Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 5073 - Contract - ADC Inc - Concession_Press Box Upgrades, Various City Parks - 01_11_1996Resolution No.5073 January 11, 1996 Item #23 BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract by and between the City of Lubbock and ADC, Inc. to furnish and install all services and materials for the Concession/Press Box Upgrades at Various City Parks, attached hereto and which shall be spread upon the minutes .of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this ATTEST: etty M. Johnson, ity Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Ltal 6A��� Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: Attorney DGV js/ADCINC.RE3 ecdocs/December 26, 1995 sm RESOLUTION # 5073 01-11-96 e w x z P N � ek- ��W pO OTC rA 0 V City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 7J457 BOB-767-2167 Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR: December 6, 1995 CLOSE DATE: December 7,1995 @ 2 PM NEW CLOSE DATE: December 14,1995 @ 2 PM BD' # L3432, CONCESSION,TRESS DOX UPGRADES AT VARIOUS Cai i PARKS ADDENDUM # 1 The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named BID. Where any item called for in the BID documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Under the GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Item #5, TI v1E AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION, the completion time has been decreased to 100 consecutive calendar days. Please change the first sentence to read as follows: "The construction covered by the contract documents shall be full completed within 100 (ONE HUNDRED) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder." 2. Please submit your bid on the enclosed revised BID SUBMITTAL form. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: LAURA RITCHIE BUYER City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 L ab -z;ck, Taus 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)767-2164 THANK YOU, Xg—, �v a ce LAURA RITCHIE BUYER PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID F F 0 F. City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 7J457 606-767-2167 Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR December 7,1995 CLOSE DATE: December 14,1995 ©. 2:00 P.M. BID #13432 - CONCESSION/PRESS BOX UPGRADES AT VARIOUS CITY PARKS ADDENDUM 02 The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Bid. Where any item called for in the Bid documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect 1. The Notice to Bidders, pare h 4, sentence 2, should be changed to read as follows: The successful bidder will a required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contractprice exceeds 5100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contras( price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. 2. In the General Conditions Of The Agreement, Item 51. Bonds should be changed to read as follows: The successful bidder will be required to furnish: a performance bond In accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contrail price in the event that said contrad price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contrail price in the event that said contrad price creeeds $25,000. AB bonds, if required; shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the SYWe of Texas And it lsjurther agreed that this contract shall not be in efjed until such bonds are so furnished 1 {{ppyy,,,,iE!Stc fnr aA•Tifirsnal wnfnrLr��fioil er cl�'l :t'9� must Suj` :'.t.� :•• P •:`:•••• '.•� �• Questions may be faxed to: PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID Laura Ritchie Buyer City of Lubbock P. O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 19457 (806) 767 2164 THANK YOU, X� 16� LAURA RlTC [E BUYER F CITY OF LUBBOCK REQUEST FOR BIDS FOR TITLE: CONCESSION/PRESS BOX UPGRADES AT VARIOUS CITY PARKS ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 13432 PROJECT NUMBER: 9910.9246 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL • BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND S. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT S. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 10. SPECIFICATIONS 11. SPECIAL CONDITION A R1 O E� U i NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID #13432 Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 7th day of December,1995, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and ` perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "CONCESSION/PRESS BOX UPGRADES AT VARIOUS CITY PARKS" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. r- It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 11th day of Januarv,1996, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by d a company carrying a current Best Rain� of B or superior• as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in etermination of the lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the r" contract to him. t It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre -bid conference on 30th day of November,1995, at t 10:00 o'clock am., in the Purchasing Conference Room, L-04, Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. a The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 767-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LVBBOCK dA VICTOR PURCHASIN MANAGER Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department at 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806)767-2167/Fax (806)767-2164. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS d GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall famish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the CONCESSION/PRESS BOX UPGRADES AT VARIOUS CITY PARKS. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. BIDDER INQUIRIES No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid must be addressed to: LAURA RITCHIE BUYER CITY OF LUBBOCK !' P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FAX (806)767-2164 5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION t The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 120 (ONE HUNDRED TWENTY) f— consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the sucoessful bidder. r The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City r reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. 6. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. r 7. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 8. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 9. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be famished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. r 13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES r` It shall be the Contractors responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractors expense. 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractors responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 15. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. ,0. l 16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE a-• The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in i progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 17. INSURANCE 1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be fumished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the e► insurer waiving the right to subrogation. i ` The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the j v Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. a JJ 18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article S 159a, Vemon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show be has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 21. PREPARATION FOR BID The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, ..r 22. association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Bid for (description of the project). Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. No Text BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE: DATE: 14 D S PROJECT NUMBER: 13432 - CONCESSION/PRESS BOX UPGRADES AT VARIOUS CITY PARKS Bid of A tb G t '� c . (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation forbids for the construction of a G04Cf-5S 10J f Q�SS having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. BASE BID All work associated with the demolition and construction of the ConcessionlPress Box facilities located at J. B. Maxey Park, 28th and Quaker, Site "B"; J. B. Maxey Park, 27th and Nashville, Site "C"; '` Mae Simmons, 24th and Martin Luther King, Site "D"; and Lou Stubbs, 35th and Avenue M, Site "E". f MATERIALS: Vye- 141�40,w* Si>rr,►. /fit/ � �a•yd &'�G�� r /1Zida�v�t� (� /�7. ao ) SERv1cEs: .t/G I,RE�($ TOTAL BASE BID�uJ�iy`ryTr•+ro ALTERNATE NO. 1 All work associated with the installation of mechanical ductwork and grilles associated with Future Evaporative Cooler. MATERIALS:]W6 r,?, �4 y % ) SERVICES: '�dL6�G f�.Fs-r�s�s✓O A '::rT y via (s 3 , C75 �� ) ` TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 1(Add): Ia S � - Al� lr-h !P (S � .Sr r• tn1� E r i; s f ' ALTERNATE NO.2 All work associated with the installation of exhaust ductwork for Future exhaust bood and exhaust fan system. r �� MATERIALS: /V!A/O'-�0��� �ur�G ✓E- (S �i l Z ) .M SERVICES:'0ic/& S,*W!g AWffeeiD TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.2 (Add): 7w6 7 cu.6:;y rY —5;r✓rjlf ($_ Zr O Z ) ALTERNATE NO.3 All work associated with the installation of vinyl composition floor tile at the Press Box and Stair �1 tread floor areas and rubber base products at the Press Box areas Only. MATERIALS: �i(�v� �� SnPr✓/� VW9: Z f±A1,09 a4 ($-z /De? � ) SERVICES: �/1%JD ��d (S ��� ell ) TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.3 (Add):It o l ✓ 445ro&tQ j�1:oe— ALTERNATE NO.4 All work associated with the demolition and construction of the Concession/Press Box facility located at L B. Maxey Park, 24th and Quaker Avenue - Site "A" Only. MATERIALS: /�,/iKrY F'iV6 T/- &4cco sc% S�,r, irld�2�0 �7'�r, ✓E (S S, (os 5 ®Q ) SERVICES://a�Q7 fluktF TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.4 (Add): G��L�'T �1� .�4�/�/�E �O/ 1� (S My 8 S � ) EtGf1Tr/ Si6�7" (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the abovokect on or before a date to be . ied in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within I (ONE HUNDRED 7%%N nsecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $200.00 (TWO HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more hilly set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (S% ) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of r award of the contract to him. r I� f t Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars (S ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 5% o r= P=,►_r-3. ,PR c c- s; Dollars (S ), which it is ragreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the r undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. r Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: Contractor (Printed or Typed Name) Ql).-- i,-,G . Company - 6�/7 2& r-5&.,7€ 4-/ Address P�FFa�GK GZ-1/3Bcc,C City, County !&.<A , el-z' etl State Zip Code Telephone: (Eb67s,3 — 3-517 Fax Number: Cg�&, 7 f 3 - 3 S7Z- LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No 1. I)AV115 ❑ e— 2. ❑ -El--' 3. e' 0 4.-v 43' ❑ s. ��i� s� / l/ldet% G 6"-5 0 B- 6. GAO IV -Ca 67- Er' 0 7.iVit/^/�� /,!j L. / �tl E�w4T. hftI B-, ❑ 9. Al km"IAI I%l1W?..t/6 0 e-- 10. 0 ❑ COMMERCIAL INDEMNITY [i .i - eiI•-i. BID BOND BOND NUMBER BD26804 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: THAT ARCHITECTS DEVELOPER CONTRACTORS, INC., 4417-71ST STREET, SUITE #41, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79424 as Principal, and COMMERCIAL INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK as Obligee, in the full and just sum of FIVE PERCENT (5%) OF THE AMOUNT BID lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal is hereby submitting its proposal for CONCESSION/PRESS BOX UPGRADES AT VARIOUS CITY PARKS NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the aforesaid Principal shall be awarded the contract the said Principal will, within the time required, enter into a formal contract and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of the contract, then this obligation to be void; otherwise, the Principal and Surety will pay unto the Obligee the difference in money between the amount of the bid of the said Principal and the amount for which the Obligee legally contracts with another party to perform the work if the latter amount be in excess of the former, but in no event shall liability hereunder exceed the penal sum hereof. Signed, sealed and delivered DECEMBER 6. 1995. ARCHITECTS DEVELOPER CONTRACTORS. INC. PRINCIPAL e X'6"� y (SEAL) C UERL I DEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY By SEAL) PON ATTORNEYdN-FACT COMMERCIAL INDEMNITY Insurance Company (formerly Commercial Lloyd's Insurance Company) IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: �- You may contact John Schuler, President of Operations, whose direct dial number is 612-444-7776. You may also fax us information at 612-440-0989. You may also call Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company's toll -free r' telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-800-234-8046 You may also write to Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company: 1507 South IH-35, Austin, Texas 78741. You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may also write the Texas Department .of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104, Austin, Texas 78714-9104, Fax 512-475-1771. PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the company first. If the dispute is not resolved you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part of condition of the attached document. Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company P.O. Box 67 COMME BD 2 fi 8 0 4 RCIAL Austin, Texas 78767 111DE14ANITY INSURANCE CO. POWER OF ATTORNEY r KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: r. That the Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, having its principal office in Austin, Texas, pursuant to the following resolution, adopted by the Board of Directors of the said Company on the 12th day of May, 1994, to wit: r" 'Resolved, that any officer of the Company shall have authority to make, execute and deliver a Power of Attorney constituting as Attorney - In -Fact, such persons, firms, or corporations as may be selected from time to time. Be It Further Resolved, that the signature of any officer and the Seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such powers so executed and certified by facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company does hereby make, constitute and appoint: JOHN W. SCHULER OR PAUL CAMERON State of Texas its true and lawful attorneys) -in -fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name,place and stead, to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver in its behalf, and its act and deed, as follows: The obligation of the Company shall not exceed one million ($1,000,000.00) Dollars. And to bind Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond or undertaking was signed by the duly authorized officer of the Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company, and all the acts of said Attorney(s) pursuantto the authority herein given, are hereby ratified and confirmed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by any officer of the Company and its Corporate Seal to be hereto affixed. �O� State of Texas County of Travis (/ John W. Schuler, President On this 12th day of May, in the year 1994, before me Ann Bennett, a notary public, personally appeared John W. Schuler, personally known �.. to me to be the person who executed the within instrument as President, on behalf of the Corporation therein named and acknowledged to me that the Corporation executed it. ,� �aT�av pu *+. ' BLOC State of To A Commission Expires 8-6-97 Ann Bennett, Notary Public CERTIFICATE 1, the undersigned, Secretary of Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached Power rof Attorney and Certificate of Authority remains in full force and has not been revoked: Signed and Sealed at the said Company at Austin, Texas dated this 6TH day of DE ZI N R ,19.�. paj any SEAL Paul Cameron, Secretary r" ftwo I"1 PAYM EW BOND 0 OHEC'! e �A 1N�EX� COMMERCIAL INDEMNITY TEXAS STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of Contract amount) STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF TRAVIS BOND NUMBER BD27129 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: THAT ARCHITECTS DEVELOPER CONTRACTORS, INC., 4417-71ST STREET, SUITE #41, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79424 (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and COMMERCIAL INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK, 1625 13TH STREET, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 (hereinafter called the Obligee) as Obligee, in the penal sum of THREE HUNDRED TWENTY TWO THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED AND NO/100----Dollars, ($322,500.00) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 12TH day of JANUARY, 1996, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for CONCESSION/PRESS BOX UPGRADES AT VARIOUS CITY PARKS, #13432. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions thereof to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 12TH day of JANUARY, 1995. ARCHITECTS DEVELOPER CONIRACTORS. INC. PRINCIPAL By.�� / , COM CIAL NITY INSURANCE COMPANY By (SEAL) PAUL CAIAERON, ATTORNEY -IN -FACT I �^ Cnmmercial Indemnity Insurance Company P.O. Box 67 BD 27129 �,Austin, Texas 78767 110MMERCIAL EIINITY INSURANCE M POWER OF ATTORNEI KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: r' That the Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, havin its principal office in Austin, Texas, pursuant to the following resolution, adopted by the Board of Directors of the said Company on the 12C day of May, 1994, to wit: r "Resolved, that any officer of the Company shall have authority to make, execute and deliver a Power of Attorney constituting as Attorney In -Fact, such persons, firms, or corporations as may be selected from time to time. Be It Further Resolved, that the signature of any officer and the Seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or an; certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shal be valid and binding upon the Company and any such powers so executed and certified by facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valii and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." Commercial Indemnity Insuranc Company does hereby make, constitute and appoint: JOHN W. SCHULER OR PAUL CAMERON State of Texas its true and lawful attomey(s)-in-fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to sign, execute acknowledge and deliver in its behalf, and its act and deed, as follows: The obligation of the Company shall not exceed one million ($1,000,000.00) Dollars. And to bind Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond or undertaking was signed b; the duly authorized officer of the Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company, and all the acts of said Attorney(s) pursuant to the authority hereii given, are hereby ratified and confirmed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signedby any officerof the Compan'. and its Corporate Seal to be hereto affixed. 0 State of Texas County of Travis John W. Schuler, President On this 12th day of May, in the year 1994, before me Ann Bennett, a notary public, personally appeared John W. Schuler, personally know to me to be the person who executed the within instrument as President, on behalf of the Corporation therein named and acknowledged to m that the Corporation executed it. Q _ NOTE IC j� ti.� 4 statiwooaa mn Commission Expires 8-6-97 Ann Bennett, Notary Public CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Secretary of Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached Powe of Attorney and Certificate of Authority remains in full force and has not been revoked: ` Signed and Sealed at the said Company at Austin, Texas dated this 12TH day of JANUARY , 19 96 -, PC Fees SEAL Paul Cameron, Secretary i COMMERCIAL INDEMNITY Insurance Company (formerly Commercial Lloyd's Insurance Company) IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact John Schuler, President of Operations, whose direct dial number is 612-444-7776. You may also fax us information at 612-440-0989. You may also call Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company's toll -free I telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: r• 1-800-234-8046 I You may also write to Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company: 1507 South I1-1-35, Austin, Texas 78741. ''" You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may also write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104, Austin, Texas 78714-9104, Fax 512-475-1771. PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the company first. If the dispute is not resolved you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part of condition of the attached document. 1 PERFORMANCE BOND 0 o g�No, --,� i�NCa �n4A L1C�N'EO $54\( o� !�- Ok�E/, Uri' , Oro- f COMMERCIAL INDEMNITY t---1 ! 1q--JM61 111 1 Et-il 1 TEXAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of Contract amount) STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF TRAVIS BOND NUMBER BD27129 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: THAT ARCHITECTS DEVELOPER CONTRACTORS, INC., 4417-71ST STREET, SUITE #41, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79424, (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and COMMERCIAL INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK, 1625 13TH STREET, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 (hereinafter called the Obligee) as Obligee, in the penal sum of THREE HUNDRED TWENTY TWO THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED AND NO/100 Dollars, ($322,500.00) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 12TH day of JANUARY, 1995, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for CONCESSION/PRESS BOX UPGRADE AT VARIOUS CITY PARKS, #13432. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specification and contract documents, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions thereof to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 12TH day of JANUARY, 1996. COMMERC NDE NITY INSURANCE COMPANY By (SEAL) PAUL C MERO ATTORNEY -IN -FACT ..Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company '.O. Box 67COMMERCIAL BD 27129 Austin, Texas 78767 INDEMNITY INSURANCE CO. POWER OF ATTORNEY r- KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: ,,.What the Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, having is principal office in Austin, Texas, pursuant to the following resolution, adopted by the Board of Directors of the said Company on the 12th day of May, 1994, to wit: 'Resolved, that any officer of the Company shall have authority to make, execute and deliver a Power of Attorney constituting as Attorney- k _n-Fact, such persons, firms, or corporations as may be selected from time to time. r"3e It Further Resolved, that the signature of any officer and the Seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or any If ,ertificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such powers so executed and certified by facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid rand binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." Commercial Indemnity Insurance i Company does hereby make, constitute and appoint: JOHN W. SCHULER OR PAUL CAMERON State of Texas its true and lawful attorneys) -in -fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to sign, execute, ricknowledge and deliver in its behalf, and its act and deed, as follows: The obligation of the Company shall not exceed one million ($1,000,000.00) Dollars. r- 4nd to bind Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond or undertaking was signed by the duly authorized officer of the Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company, and all the acts of said Attorney(s) pursuant to the authority herein �iven, are hereby ratified and confirmed. W WITNESS WHEREOF, the Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by any officer of the Company rand its Corporate Seal to be hereto affixed. f TM I SEAL John W. Schuler, President 73tate of Texas County of Travis 70n this 12th dayof May, in the year 1994, before me Ann Bennett, a notary public, personally appeared John W. Schuler, personally known Y Y rA me to be the person who executed the within instrument as President, on behalf of the Corporation therein named and acknowledged to me .hat the Corporation executed it. �j eo ,wN NENNrft '(.� HotterPOLh� to:.°., -ommission Expires 8-6-97 Ann Bennett, Notary Public CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Secretary of Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached Power ^)f Attorney and Certificate of Authority remains in full force and has not been revoked: Signed and Sealed at the said Company at Austin, Texas dated this 12TH day of JANUARY , 19 96 . SUL Paul Cameron, Secretary r COMMERCIAL INDEMNITY Insurance Company (formerly Commercial Lloyd's Insurance Company) IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact John Schuler, President of Operations, whose direct dial number is 612-444-7776. You may also fax us information at 612-440-0989. You may also call Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company's toll -free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-800-234-8046 You may also write to Commercial Indemnity Insurance Company: 1507 South I1-1-35, Austin, Texas 78741. You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-262-3439 You may also write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104, Austin, Texas 78714-9104, Fax 512-475-1771. r PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the company first. If the dispute is not resolved you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part of condition of the attached document. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE r- r JAN-11-1996 16:53 FROM GARY, BOWERS & COMPANY TO 7672164 P.01 •.......... � ��• 1••• .. +ate"� i'% ^arras X"f^ %•X>i!%:kf{}!% •• i ,� 3 + a v:e % Xb 9 •k�1 k �`.kn % ftl f€i 6 'f dx x y � A k , :>k x; x. q 'tb 2 sii4:x�•. +' �xt:f 'a dei:`i3�`�'.SS.�.'�..w•:'��x 3E M7?i��.S;:i? w x. x.f..r4.. % M' l�f%�a.,..i x;EX.%aow,e%yH?M1WfW.:.wi:•i.'4 FjS. � Pi4k.•L'x ?t".wiaatelea.•k<d,..::J..:°' PRODUCER FIAVTD TAT>3 INSURANCE AGENCY 5233 7 9TH SS <'Y 3 •%3♦ 4 a%:feaWko aieA: x:ek.%.kek.kM:Y: k>y .k'i +�tt X•k9?exal++4k4:4f0%:khlk Yk.ke•.e.a %K, 3?i:M', �i k a UK ?r k,i:r �y'+j,I�QAIG ;�x'�•x�{#xhtx%SLk Y.tit Yii�{4i'viS3rN'v >d"t7; ss.. �• ,y� 44 :itL u > aa. x 3 }n' x x�F �fK+ft da �;ie x : bed !Ft :X 1+�k d ko xa: r.« x / 5 aexre..e•x.>. x.. .i:. a:. .%,•. •>.. a..#F'FYiiL$'iii�� '°'�.: 12 / 18 19 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY ANC CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATI DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE UBSOCK, TX 79424 COMPANY A LETTER GREAT AMERICAN (806) 794-1177 COMPANY (3 6>cTT6a j INSURED COMPANY C LETTER CSITECTS r DEVELOPERS & ONTRACTORS , INC COMPANY D LETTER 417 71ST #41 ubbock TX 79424 COMPANY E LETTER (8 0 6) 7 9 3— 3 317 y y ,/y �a % }( y { px { }t) Y y .ra.n.' 3AxXW +%i!x +�tooyn Xii'XX:% k' %'ffeeS% k i�%dA itf 4%% kK%f[:x0%ir'. �'fl�ft i+n�;•3:� 8 S $a.ky Ik' �, �',',xt��F+c'i 'R3adf ii%f:: l<X x•f �fiei{:% SitM6:6Xaii3fOM%rf,3:�::5:xa%Sita%>M4:4 rs,,ff xx X e %?W%%e XxXoNyX•X eqx w.e �i xtx: u,k'•t k#. k3i?Ttii::i:iC K > �F'9` P �k!xQM.kpxix,>lx:lg JdiN:s%: 4v�faa.fi>S X a�.a�. w:ax .<%'ake.,!a:nYVn:.kaN%+�t:k+%&AN:k:Wf:w.4Y•%el�%n:i �Y•%:%M<i+r THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POUCY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POUCIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTNE DATE (MMIDDAN) POLICY EXPIPA110H GATE (MIACC j UMITS tiENEpAt LIA8IUTY GENERAL AGGREGATE E 10 0 0 0 0 0 NMMWI= OENERAL UA131U Y CLAmmAmX7wcvR. TCP702407900 12/03/95 12/03/96 AGG. $10 0 0 0 0 0 PERSONAL& AM. INJURY $1000000 EACH OCOURFAENCE $10 0 0 0 0 0 FIRE DAMAGE Om yomfiT $5 0 0 0 0 MED. EXPENSE one raonj $ 5 0 0 0 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO OOMt NEp S[NGLE UMrr 500000 SODILY INJURY (par perm) i AI.L OWNED AUTOS SCNEOULED AUTOS r,IAMAUTM NON•OWNMAUTCS TBA702408000 12/03/95 12/03/96 vomy xw (Poramftno S PROPERTY DAMAGE f ('sAFtAGE LIABILITY �LGlSS LIABlLJTY uMe�Euxr BINDER 12/22/95 12/22/96 EACH OCCURRENCE $10 0 0 0 0 0 AammGATS t OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM M/ORKEKS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' UABIUTY i STATUTCRYUMiTS :5., EACH ACCOE4NT b15EASE-POLICY OMIT is DLREA9E-EACH EMPLOYEE Is OMER ADDITIONAL INS. CITY OF LUBBOCK TBA70240800 12/03/95 12/03/96 01:9CR "ow OF OPJrRATi0t1StLOCA17ONSJYE}IICLES/EPIGWLiSEEAB OLICY SUPERCEDES THIS DOCUMENT. EXCLUSIONSr LIMITATIONS AND ENDORSEMENTS F POLICIES SHALL APPLY TO THIS DOCUMENT. ALL POLICIES SMALL CONTAI AN AGREEMENT ON THE PART OF THE INSURER WAIVING RIGRTTOSUBROGA ty Of Lubbock x 2000 bbock, Texas 79457 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THI EXPIPAYION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR T( MAIL ---1 0 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THI LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION 01 LIABILITY O NY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVIKE PRODUCER Sanford Insurance Agency P.O. Boz 64790 Lubbock, TY 79464 (806) 792-SS64 WOURED ADC, INC it ARCHITECTS, DEVELOPERS & CONTRACTORS, INC. 4417 71ST ST., 041 LUBBOCK T8 79424 CO I= it;35'!.C. :•>:,,9::<i::3 S,r<y-s.,;..+.,';.:<.:>fia.l.;�r:< Y�{.,'$,;.�. ir+. OAIR PONWIM :y l 12/15/19 l- ' a THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A YATIER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER- THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICES BELOW. A� TEXAS WC INS. FUND COMPANY B LUNBERMANIS MUTUAL -(REAPER) COWANY COWANY D THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED M THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REOUIREMEM, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIRCATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HERON IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CAMS. HYPE OP MIpIUNC! POLi;Y NIAlER POLICY @°PEm"E DATE IWDWM POLICY EA"FLATMI DATE (W WVY) Lam ODUWAL LIA M= GENERAL AGGREGATE Is - PROOUCTS - COW)OP AGO s COMMERCIAL GENERAL LLMMM CLAMS MADE ED OCCUR PERSONAL i ADV N,IM i EACH OCCURRENCE i OWNERS A CONTRACTOR'S PROT FFE DAMAGE one *a) i IED EXP VVV one ) s AUTOMOBLE LLAALITY ANY AUTO COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT Ill GODLY KlUITY Pi ' s ALL OV0ED AUTOS ": SCHEDULED AUTOS GODLY *LlUIRY GO AYdenO i NM AUTOS NON-ONRED AUTOS LOE LIAILRY ANY AUTO PRCPEifY DAMAGE i AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT i OIiFER THAN AUTO ONLY - EACH ACCME NT i �CEli LIAI/JTY EACH OCCUFFF3NCE i UMBIWELLA FORM AGGREGATE i OTHER THAN UM8R .LA FORM s WORKERS COMPENSATION AND I &TAMORY LIMITS A ElIPL0"ERV LMJW= SSP-=1040= 12 /16 /9 5 12 /16 /9 6 EAcN Ac=Err s5o�.000 THE PROPREM pq RIM DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT SSWAW PARfNEFSE7ECLnM CFFi M:tS ARE EXCL DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYE£ t5NAW OTTER B BUILDERS SA761740144 05/10/95 05/10/96 ANY ONE SITE swim RISK ANYONE OCCUR 50o,000 RE: CONCESSION/PRESS BOB UPGRADES CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOB 2000 LUBBOCK TB 79457 SHOULD ANY OF TIE AMOYE COCMED POL ICM EIE CANCELLED MORE TIE IZIFIRAMW DATE TTEREOF. Will 1111111,111100 COW%W ELL BDEAVOR TO SEAL 10 DAYS WAIRTLTDI NOTICE TO TTE CERTIFICATE IIDLFnEff EIUTEI41CN EIfOTICE AID OP ::;!�NAL TIE . ITS1. AUT MIZED A I • SANFORD iNSURANUI i CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Appropriate Insurance Agent/Broker Prior to Award of Contract I, the undersigned Agent/Broker, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Contractor. If the below identified Contractor is awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten ( 10) days after being notified of such award by contractor, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. Agent (Signature) Name of Agent/Broker: 71 Address of Agent/Broker: City/State/Zip: Agent/Broker Telephone #: { ) Date: .. CONTRACTOR'S NAME: (Print or Type ) �., CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: f Agent (Print) NOTE TO AGENTIBROKER If this time requirement is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806)767-2165. r BID #13432 - CONCESSION/PRESS BOX UPGRADES AT VARIOUS CITY PARKS r, f- CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; �.. (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing Cextension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; r� (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common T" to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: 7 REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE r„ "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see 1 reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and ! materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at S 12440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to r., provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project: (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (0) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. ❑ 0-^-' � �-�- �--~ . �-- �---- k-^-' K--- K--- �--- K -- 8' - K--� � .� � -- K �- - O- � � CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 11th day of January,1996, by and between the City of Lubbock, County r of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to ` as OWNER, and ADC, INC. of the City of Lubbock County of Lubbock, and the State of Texas, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR r- i A r- WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the constriction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #13432 - CONCESSION/PRESS BOX UPGRADES AT VARIOUS CIW PARKS - $322,500.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to oommence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas, in the year and day first above written. pw .. _.�. 17 APPROVED AS TPFORM: ATTEST: Corporate Secretary r+ i CONTRACTOR: �� v ADC, Inc. 4417 71st Street, Suite 41 Lubbock, Texas 79424 i! F1; lil': GENERAL COMMONS OF nM r GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. . CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: ADC. INC, who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to JOHN WEBB, PARK DEVELOPMENT SUPERVISOR City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions: of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. S. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. S. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently aomssible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. I Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to �., insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives' estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time I" such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance r., required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work The s Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his i decision. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE i The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be ' binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations f' of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be bome by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. is. 19. 20. 21 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion,incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. F 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owners Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in -full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) percent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of r., the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100°/% unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below provided. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or ownees Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor, inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. �•. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried ` with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $750.000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived) B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $750,000 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $500.000 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self - insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (IVCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance overage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in 0406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The contractor shall provide overage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the overage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. S. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing overage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 'I 6. The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing service:: on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. r-^ 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all t coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. f 11. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten (10) days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten (10) days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than (7) seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; i retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurances This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verb whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (iv) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (I), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner, provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof. if the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. A J 4 33. ASSIGI`OVSENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligation.-, to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 34. TDAE FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $200.00�0 HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractorshall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. 35. 71ME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, r- either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work f done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. r` i 36. EXTENSION OF TIME ,. The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered 1 in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an r extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then consider such written request and respond to Contractor in writing granting or rejecting the request for an extension of time to complete the project. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. OUANTIMS AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of arty kind arising out of the existence or character of the work. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fimlt or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage due Contractor. 43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE �F Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been 177 completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said f time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the �., duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 44. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for AMIment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYNM-NT r" Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 47. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of. r (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 48. TIME OF FII,ING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owners Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. 49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner, or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within thirty (30) days after the date of certificate of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provida3, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the attached bid, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 51. BONDS The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 1000/a of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. r- 1 52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES l Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative _ hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 55. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. No Text Resolution T2502 January 8, 1987 Agenda Item #18 DGV:da RESOLUTION WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft.or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984; and WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades Exhibit C: Electrical Trades Exhibit 0: Overtime Rate Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1, 1987. Ranett oyd, City Secretary ' APPROVED T ONTENT: Bi 1 P,yne, D rector of Building Services Z. C� . G,i'—o&-` B.C. McMINN, MAYOR APPROVED AS TO FORM: Do ld G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney r EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator Heavy Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator, Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer, General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer.. Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder - Certified Hourly Rate $11.60 8.35 .5.50 10.50 5.00 11.00. 5.50 7.35 8.70 10.50 5.25 8.00 5.70 8.00 7.50 9.50 5.00 7.30 4.75 5.60 8.75 9.25 6.00 7.65 4.75 8.75 5.50 8.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Asphalt Heaterman $5.25 Asphalt Shoveler 4.75 Concrete Finisher 7.35 Concrete Finisher -Helper 4.75 Electrician 10.50 Flagger 4.75 Form Setter 6.50 Form Setter -Helper 5.50 Laborer, General 4.75 Laborer, Utility 5.80 Mechanic 6.50 Mechanic -Helper 6.00 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS Asphalt Paving Machine 6.00 Bulldozer 5.25 Concrete Paving Machinist 6.50 Front End Loader 5.85 Heavy Equipment Operator 6.40 Light Equipment Operator 6.40 Motor Grade Operator 8.00 Roller 5.25 Scraper 5.25 Tractor 5.50 Truck Driver - Light 5.25 Heavy 5.25 EXHIBIT C Electric Construction Trades Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Power Line Foreman $11.00 Lineman Journeyman 10.45 — Lineman Apprentice Series 8.90 Groundman Series 7.25 EXHIBIT D _ Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate. -- EXHIBIT E Prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 1/2 times base rate. — F SPECIFICATIONS r SPECIFICATIONS FOR NEIN FACILITIES FOR THE CITY OF LUSSOCK ANZ) PARKS AE)MINISTRATION r.>EPARTMENT CONCESSIONIFRESS sOx UP6RAVES FOR J. B. MAXEY, LOU STU555 AND MAE SIMMONS PARKS - LUBBOCK, TEXAS MESLS PARTNERSHIP, INC. ARCHITECTS • INTERIORS • PLANNERS 6502 Slide Road - Suite 403 PARTNERSHIP Lubbock, Texas 79424.1311 ams . - -3 . - . . 806.794.4726 Fax 806.794.4667 ARmuE=-"' u0m DIVISIONS 2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11 ROBERTS AND THOMA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2574 74th Street - Suite 202 Lubbock, Texas 79423.1406 806.745.4881 Fax 806.745.9688 DIVISION 3, SECTIONS 02514,04230,06192 f 6,-W..,J`. i HOMA, JF 56920 �4 FS • ��S7E����'� COMPLIANCE SERVICES GROUP, INC. ENGINEERS AND SCIENTISTS 7619 University Avenue - Suite 2A Lubbock, Texas 79423.2126 806.748.0040 Fax 806.748.0030 DIVISION 15 DIVISION 16 NEIN FAGILITIs FOfk THE amy OF. LUBSO'CoK AND PARKS AOMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT GONCESSIC. N/pRESS 5OX UPCGRADFS FOR J. 13. MAXEY, LOU STUBBS AND MAE SIMMONS PARKS LUBBOCK, TEXAS PREPARED BY: SLS PARTNERSHIP, ,lNCo. ARCHITECTS • INTERIORS • PLANNERS 6502 5LIVZ ROAD - SUITE 4405 LUBBOCK, TEXAS -79424:151 1 606.1 C14.4126 606.194.466'7 r-Ax t DATE: NOVEMBER 1 9 9 5 SLS J05 NUMBER 09.95 1 L SET NO. TABLE OF CONTENTS VIV15iON 2 SITE WORK Section 02060 02012 02100 02200 02222 02514 5uilding Demolition Minor Demolition For Remodeling site clearing Earthwork Excavation, Trenching and 8ackfiiling Concrete Walks DIVISION 5 CONCRETE Section 05510 concrete . DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04200 Unit Masonry 04250 Reinforced Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 M9TALS Section 05 500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY AND WOODWORK Section 06100 carpentry Work 06400 Architectural Woodwork 061412 Prefabricated Wood Trusses DIVISION I M015TURE AND THEE-MAL PROTECTION Section 0,7 1 -7 5 Water Repellant coating 011600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 017611 Sheet Metal Roofing and Wall Panels 01900 Caulking and Sealants DIVISION 6 DOORS, WINDOW5 AND &1.A55 section 08150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 05665 Aluminum 511ding Window Unit 05700 Finish Hardware 05500 &lass and blazing 5 5 2 10 5 5 25 9 6 4 2 6 fi 5 6 6 8 fi PAS,E 1 r DIVISION 9 FINISHES section 09650 04g00 TA¢LE OF CONTENTS Resillent Flooring - Alternate #s Painting DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10165 Plastic Laminate Toilet Compartments 10210 Metal Mall Louvers 10400 Signage 10600 Toilet AC.Cessories DIVISION 1 1 EQUIPMENT Section 11400 Food Service Equipment DIVISION 1 2 FURNI5HIN65 (Not in this Contract) " DIVISION 15 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not In this Contract) DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (Not in this Contract) DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section 15140 supports and anchors 15260 Piping Insulation 15410 Plumbing Piping 15450 Plumbing Specialties 15440 Plumbing Flxtures 15450 Plumbing Equipment 15650 Ductwork DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16111 Conduit 16125 Building Mire and Cable 16150 Boxes 16 140 Wiring Devices 161,70 Grounding and Bonding 1 6 150 Supporting Devices 16195 Electricalldentification Pages 4 10 5 s 2 a IT 5 4 4 8 s s PAGE 2 r TABLE OF CONTENTS, 16421 16441, Utility Service Entrance Enclosed Switches 164'70 Panelboards 16510 Interior L-Uminarles, r DRlLWIN6S BOUND SEPARATELY End of Table of Contents 4 i G � I 4 i 3' 1 `s r i i ..r . Pages 2 5 5 8 PAGE 5 }roll f 1 SUII.aING aEMOLITION SECTION 02060 PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, supplementary 0eneral Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specifled in this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Demolition of designated structures and removal of materials from the site. .B. Demolition and removal of foundations and slabs on grade. G, Gap and identify exposed utilities to remain. D. Disconnecting, capping and removal of Identified utilities. E. Removal of underground piping. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Barriers, fences and landscape protection and dust/erosion control. B, Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment C. Section 01 'TOO - Contract Closeout: Project record documents. D. Section 02100 - Site Clearing: clearing outside periphery of structures. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 'TOO. B. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions. 1.06 REGULATORY REOUIREMENT5 A. Conform to applicable code for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust and erosion control and disposal B. Obtain required permits from authorities. G. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their SECTION 02060 PAGE 1 BUIL VING VEMOLITION SECTION 02060 requirements. V. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks or hydrants without permits and 5 day notification to the Owner. E. Conform to applicable regulatorW procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. 1.06 SEQUENCINCG A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section O 1010. 1.01 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 01500. S. Schedule work to precede site excavation work. C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule. — PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices as required. S. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances and structures which are not to be demolished. C. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring as required. D. Sprinkle work with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections for this purpose as required and maintain adherence to OSkA erosion, runoff and dust control measures. 5.02 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures. S. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses. SECTION 02060 PAGE 2 SIJILPINO 17EMOLITION SECTION 02,060 Maintain protected egress and access at all times. G. Obtain written permission from adjacent property Owners when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. O. Sprinkle work with water to minimize dust. Provide necessary connections to achieve this purpose. 5.05 DEMOLITION A. 0l5connect, cap or remove designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Remove foundation walls and footings beyond area of new construction. Co. Remove concrete slabs on grade. O. Rough grade and compacted areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades and contours. E. Remove demolished materials from site. F. Oo not burn orbury materials on site. Leave site in clean condition. 6. Remove temporary work. 5.04 SCHEOULES A. Coordinate items to be retained by the Owner; deliver to location designated by the Owner. End of Section SECTION 02060 PA6E 3 t MINOR VEMOLITION .FOR REMOVELING j SECTION 02012 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General conditions, 5peaial conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 NIORK INCLUDED A. The extent of demolition work is shown and noted on the Drawings and specified herein. B. coordinate work of trades and schedule elements of alterations and renovation work by procedures and methods herein specified to expedite completion of work. C. cap and identify exposed utilities. D. Patch floors where walls or utilities have been removed. E. in addition to that specifically shown; cut, move or remove items necessary to provide access or to allow alterations and new work to proceed. Include such items as: 1.Repair or removal of hazardous or unsanitary conditions. 2.Kemoval of unsuitable or extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, rusted metals and deteriorated concrete. S.Cleaning of surfaces, and removal of surfaae finishes as needed to install new work and finishes. F. Patch, repair and refinish existing items to remain, to the specified condition for each material. Provide a workmanlike transition to adjacent new items of construction. 1.05 RELATED YNORK A. Division 16: Mechanical i Plumbing. B. Division 16: Electrical. 1.04 PROTECTION A. Do not interfere with use of adjacent areas. Maintain free and safe passage to area of work and in public corridors adjacent to area of work. SECTION02072 PAGE 1 MINOR VEMOLITION FOR REMOPELING SECTION 020'1 2 S. Prevent movement or settlement of structure(s). Provide and place bracing or shoring and be responsible for safety and support of structure. Assume liability for such movement, settlement. damage or Injury. C. Cease operations and notify the Architect immediately, if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structure. ao not resume operations until safety Is restored. P. Provide, erect and maintain barricades, lighting; and guardrails as required by applicable regulatory advisory to protect occupants of building and workers. E. Protect existing finishes, :equipment, and adjacent work which is scheduled to remain. Protect existing and new work from weather and extremes of temperature. - 1.Maintain existing interior work above 60 degrees F. 2.Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control as needed to prevent damage to remaining existing work and to new work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Assign the work of moving, removal, cutting and patching to trades qualified to perform the work in a manner to cause the least damage to each type of work, and provide a means of returning surface5 to the appearance of new work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAl.5 A. verify with the Architect before moving any debris or material from the site. B. Relics and antiques (i.e. cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques, and tablets) and similar ob jeets remain the property of the Owner. Notify Architect prior to removal and obtain acceptance regarding method of removal. C. carefully remove, store and protect for reinstallation of. items indicated to be reinstalled on the plans. P. carefully remove the materials and equipment, indicated on the plans to be removed and be retained by the Owner. Deliver and store where directed by the Architect. E. Salvage sufficient quantities of cut or removed material to replace damaged work or existing construction when material is not readily obtainable on current market. SECTION 020'7 2 PA&E 2 1' - MINOR VEMOLITION FOR REMOVELING k SECTION 02012 F. Do not incorporate salvaged or used material in new construction without the permission of the architect, except where it is indicated on the drawings that salvaged or existing materials are to be reused. 6. Floor patch materials shall be equal to camps Latex Repair Kit to level floors or Pavecrete to patch holes. 2.02 PRODUCT5 FOR PATCHING, EXTENDING ANa MATCHING ' A. Provide same products of types of construction as that In existing structure as needed to patch, extend or match existing work. Generally the contract Documents will not define products or standards of workmanship present in f existing construction. The contractor shall determine products by inspection.and necessary testing. 5. The presence of a product, finish, or type of construction requires that patching, A extending or matching shall be performed as necessary to make the Work complete and consistent to ldentical standards of quality. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. carry out demolition work to cause as little inconvenience to adjacent occupied building areas as possible. B. When demolition work creates an excess amount of dust, provide protection around the source to contain the dust and prevent it from entering spaces that the public uses or any other spaces that are used for any purpose other than this construction project. G. Notify the Architect at least 12 hours before concrete slab drilling or cutting. Schedule all construction activities that involve extreme vibration and noise with the Architect. 5.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner as required to accommodate new work. Protect existing foundations, walls, supporting structural members, openings, and utilities that remain. 5. Perform demolition in accordance with applicable authorities having jurisdiction. G. Perform cutting and removal work to remove minimum materials necessary, and in r= a manner to avoid damage to adjacent work. cut surfaces such as masonry, tile, piaster or metal by methods designed to terminate surfaces in a straight line at a natural point of division. ! SECTION 02017 2 FACE 5 t� MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMOOELING SECTION 02012 D. Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching existing quality workmanship. Quality of patched or extended work shall not be less than that specified for new work. E. Patch and replace any portion of an existing finished surface which is found to be damaged, lifted, discolored, or shows other imperfections with matching material. 1.Provide adequate support of substrates prior to patching a finish 2.1zefinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces in a manner to produce a uniform color and texture over the entire surface. S.When existing, surface finish conditions cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to the nearest intersections. F. When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make a smooth and workmanlike transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so that the patch or transition is invisible at a distance of five feet. When finished surfaces are cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface in a neat manner along a straight line as a natural line of division, and provide trim appropriate to finished surface. CG. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required, at no cost to the Owner. H. Burning of materials on .site is not permitted. I. Remove from site, contaminated, vermin -infested or dangerous materials encountered and dispose of by safe, means Boas not to endanger health of workers and public. ..I. Remove tools and equipment from site upon completion of work. Leave site in a condition acceptable to the Architect. K. Remove debris daiiy from the site. L. Glean Owner occupied areas daily. M. Glean spillage, overspray, and heavy collections of dust in Owner occupied areas Immediately. N. At completion of work of each trade, clean area and make surfaces ready for work of successive trades. SECTION 020'7 2 PACSE 4 ,— c MINOR VEMOUTION FOR REMOVELINCG SECTION 02012 5.05 FLOOR PATCHING A. Repair all floors where wails, utilities or other items are removed. 5. Fill all holes in concrete floor slab with fine sand/cement mixture with bonding. agent, equal to pavecrete. G. All floor patching shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Architect and to the finish flooring contractors. End of Section SECTION 020672 PACDE 5 i SITE CLEARING SECTION 02 100 PART 1 GENERAL • 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENT5 A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work gpeaifled in this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Remove surface debris. 5. Remove paving and sidewalks as shown on the Drawings and coordination of utility salvage or relocation. C. Gap and identify exposed utilities. D. Removal of site plant life, grass, shrubs and associated root systems. E. Top soil excavation and removal of all demolished materials and surplus materials from the site. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. 5ection 02060 - 5uilding Demolition. 5. 5ection 02200 - Earthwork 1.04 REGULATORY REOUIREMENT5 A. conform to applicable code for disposal of debris. 5. coordinate clearing Work with utility .companies. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. verify that existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or identified. SECTION 02100 PAGE 1 SITE CLEARING SECTION 02100 5.02 PROTECTION A. Locate, identifb, and protect utilities that remain form damage. 5. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remaln as final landscaping. C. Protect existing structures from damage or displacement. 5.05 CLEAKIN& A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work. M. Remove all items within the marked area as indicated on the Drawings, and clear all undergrowth or deadwood from site excavations. 5.04 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re -landscaped, or re- graded. 5. Stockpile In area designated by the Owner on site to depth not exceeding & feet. Protect from erosion. Remove exoess topsoil not being reused from site. C. Do not excavate wet topsoil. 5.05 REMOVAL A. Remove debris, rock and extracted plant life from the site. End of Section SECTION 02 100 PAGE 2 F,ARTHINORK SECTION 02200 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS .r• A. The general provisions of the Contract, Including General Conditions, Supplementary General conditions, special Conditions and General Requirements CDivislon 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK r- A The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings. r B. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs and walks is included as part of this work. C. Backfiiling of trenches within building lines is included as part of this work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE *. A. codes and standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and inspection service: Employ, at contractor's expense, testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. The testing laboratory shall comply with the requirements of ASTM 05140, Evaivation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil or Rock Used In Engineering Design and construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 'POW, A. Test Reports: submit following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copies to contractor and Engineer. 1. Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil encountered. AV - a. Atterberg Limits k b. Linear Shrinkage c. Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve " 'SECTION 02200 PAGE 1 EARTHWORK SECTION 02 200 2. Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills. Reports shall indicate soil type or Change of soil if any other is used. 1.05 JOS' CONDITIONS A. Site Information 1. A subsurface soils investigation at three of the sites has been made. Logs of borings and test data are available for Contractor's Information and for his interpretation as to soil and water conditions that may be encountered at the site. 2. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. Data are made available for the convenience of the Contractor. s. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to owner. 4. A subsurface soils investigation at two of the sites has not been performed. Test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping re5pective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. C. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted. SECTION 02200 PAGE 2 _ t , D. Protection of Persons and Propertg: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authoritle5 having ,Jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, - washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS i 2.01 SOIL MATERIAL5 A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with A5TM 0 2489 soil classification groups SM. 6P, GM, GC, 5G, CL, SM, SW and 5P. B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM a . 2489 loll classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and Pt. G. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of clay lumps, stones - and debris. D. BackfiII and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. Fill materials shall have a liquid limit between 4 and 55 and the plasticity index shall be between 4 and 12. PART 5 EXECUTION 1 5.01 EXCAVATION i A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when tr establishing required finish grade elevations. B. Earth excavation inciude5 removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities 1 indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated In data on subsurface conditions, and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation or unauthorized excavation. +- SECTION 02200 PACGE 5 EARTHWORK SECTION 02200 • C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated -- subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense. P. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Architect. E. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. P. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect who will make an inspection of conditions. 1 If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. G. Stability of Excavations 1. slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having Jurisdiction. shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. H. newatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. * no not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to —' prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge -- lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey, SECTION 02200 PACK. 4 SECTION 02200 water away from excavations. 2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Po not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. I. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated -materials where directed, until required for backfiII or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper r drainage. 1 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 2. dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. J. Excavation for Structures 0" . . 1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, Installation of services, other construction, and for inspection. 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not -to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to fine" grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to -required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. K. Excavation for Trenches 1. dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be Installed, suffidentiy wide to provide ample working room. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Garry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups. S. where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. i` SECTION 0.2200 c PACGE 5 E,h.RTH W ORK SECTION 02200 4. trade bottoms of trenches as Indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. S. BackfIII trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within -- 18" of oolumn or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place oonorete to level of bottom of adjacent footings. 6. Concrete is specified in division S. 17. too not baakfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and baokfilling authorized by Architect. use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems, L. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 55 degrees F. (1 degree G.) 5.02 COMPACTION A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area olassiflcation. B. Percentage of Maximum tensity Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM t 6 a 8 (Standard Proctor); and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM t 204a, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship. 1. Structures: Compact top 12" of sybgrade and each layer of backfill or -- fill material at a5% maximum dry density or 9096 relative dry density. 2. Building Slabs and Steps: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backf Ill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or a0% relative dry density. S. Lawn or unpaved Areas. Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of "- backflll or fill material at ao% maximum dry density. 4. walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill materials at cm% maximum dry density or ao% relative dry density. SECTION 02200 PACvk 6 SECTION 02200 G. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture i conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or {- subsequent to compaction operations. 1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet �,. to permit compaction to specified density. 2. soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by dicing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content Is reduced to a satisfactory value. 5.05 BACKFILL AND FILL A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area alasslfication listed below. 1. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. S. Under walks and steps use satisfactory excavated or borrow material, or combination of both. 4. Under building slabs, use satisfactory borrow material. fi B. Backf ill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: ,r 1. Acceptance of . construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. i 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground 1 ` utilities. S. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of trash and debris. C. Ground surface Preparation "' SECTION 02200 PAGE 'i EARTHINORK SECTION 02200 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up so that fill material will bond with existing surface. .- 2. when existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth:and percentage of maximum density. D. Placement and Compaction 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6" in loose�depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. 2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification, Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 5. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to _ required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift.: 5.04 GRADING A. General: uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, Including adjacent transition areas. 5mooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and toprevent ponding. SECTION 02200 FASE 5 — EARTHY40RK SECTION 02200 C. Finish surfaces free from Irregular surface changes, and as follows: 1 1. Lawn or unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or i� below required subgrade elevation. D. trading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1h" when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. E. Compactlon: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and t percentage of maximum density for each area classlficatlon. 5.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I k , 1 A. Quality Control Testing During Construction 1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. 2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (Band Gone Method) or ASTM D 2161 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D 2a22,(Nuclear Gauge Method) as applicable. 8. Building Slab subgrade 1. Make at least one flaid density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of building slab, but in no case less than 5 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying .. building slab, but in no case less than 5 tests. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and approved by the testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer. i C. If, In opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense. i 5.06 MAINTENANCE r SECTION 02200 PAGE 9 PEARTHWORK SECTION 02200 ~ A. Protection of Graded Areas 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. _ 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specifled tolerances. 13. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, saarify .surface, re -shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. 5.01 n15PO5AL OF EXCE55 ANP ^A5TE MATERIAL5 A. Removal from Owner's Property 1. Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's propertW. End of Section This 5eation Prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. SECTION 02 200 PASvE 10 EXCAVATION, TRENCH AND BACKFILL f SECTION 02222 PA6E 1 PART 1. 6ENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, Including General conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirement, (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Trench and backfill for underground utilities. B. Excavate for foundations, slabs and incidentals. C. Remove debris and surplus excavated material from site. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200: Earthwork B. Section 055 10: Concrete C. Section 15: Mechanical and Plumbing Systems D. Division 1 b: Electrical Systems PART 2. PRODUCT5 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sand for under concrete walks, slabs, foundations and utilities. Clean natural river or bank sand; free from silt, clay, loam friable or soluble materials, and organic matter; with grading requirements the same as specified for the fine aggregate used for concrete. See Section 05510. B. Backfill: Sub -soil free from alkali, salt, petroleum products, roots, rocks larger than 5 inches in diameter and building debris. PART 5. EXECUTION 5.01 PROTECTION A. Protect lawns from damage, rake clean after work is complete. B. Protect existing structures, roads, sidewalks and paving against damage from equipment and vehicular or foot traffic. rr I SECTION 02222 PASSE 1 EXCAVATION, TRENCH ANP BACKPILL SECTION 02 2 2 2 PASSE 2 G. Frotect'excavations by shoring, bracing, or other methods as required to prevent loose dirt from falling into excavations. D. Maintain existing utility lines which pass through work area. sleeve lines that pass through the foundation. E. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines rerouted or extend. F. Notify the Architect of unexpected sub -surface conditions and discontinue work In area until the proper authority provides notification to resume work. 6. Grade around excavations to prevent surface water runoff into excavated areas. 5.02 TRENGHIN6 FOR UTILITIES A. Trench for electrical service. Ensure trenching does not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundations. B. Trenches shall be excavated so as to provide a minimum depth of cover of s0 Inches, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Architect or Engineer.. 5.05 EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATIONS, 5LAB5 AND INGIDENTAL5 A. Excavate subsoil in accordance with lines and levels required for construction of the work, including space for forms, bracing and shoring. B. Po additional excavations only by written authorization of the Architect. Unauthorized excavation shall be corrected as directed by the Architect or owner at no cost to the owner. C. Hand trim excavations and leave free from loose or organic matter. D. Excavations are not to interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation. 5.04 SACKFILLIN6 A. Do not start backfilling until services have been inspected. B. Ensure areas to be backfilled, including trenches, are free of building debris and water. SECTION 02222 PA67M 2 r, EXCAVATION, TRENCH AND 5ACKFILL SECTION 02222 PAC7E S G. Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth. Use a method so as not to disturb or damage services. D. SaakfiII with sub -soil areas at walks to receive , concrete slabs to sand bed level and compact. Fill with sand to concrete slab level. 5ooth and level top surface of sand fill. E. Sackfill electric utility line trenches with sand to cover conduit. FIII remainder of trenches with sub -soil and compact. 5.05 SURPLU5 MATERIALS A. Remove surplus backfill materials from site. B. Remove all broken concrete, trash and construction debris, from the site. End of Section SECTION 02222 PA&E 5 CONCRETE JNALKS r t SECTION 02514 PART 1 &ENERAL 1.01 RELATED 0000MENTS r A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Speclai conditions and General (.. Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. q 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK r' A. The extent of concrete walks 15 shown on the Drawings. B. Comply with applicable requirement of Section 05510, Concrete Work, for materials, testing, mixing, placing and curing, except as herein specified r otherwise. rti 1.OS JOB CONDITiON5 A. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades. s PART 2 PRODUCT5 2.01' MATERIAL5 } r A. Forms Either steel or wood, of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use forms that are straight and free of distortion and r- defects. Bent, twisted, split or defective form materials are not permitted. �., 2.. Use flexible spring steel farms or laminated boards to form radius bends f as required. 5. Coat forms with a non -staining, clear, paraffin base form oil that will not f q discolor or otherwise deface the surface of the concrete. B. concrete: comply with appiicebie requirement of Section 05510. Concrete ` Work, for concrete materials. Concrete mix shall not be the same as used for building -slabs and foundations. Exterior concrete shall attain a minimum r" SECTION 02514 1 q PAGE 1 CONCRETE AALKS - SECTION 02514 compressive strength of 5000 psi at 25 days and shall contain six (b) sacks — (564 lbs.) of cement per cubic yard of concrete, 6 percent plus or minus 1 percent of entrained air, coarse aggregate 1 " or smaller and shall be poured with a slump of 5" plus or minus 1 ". C. Expansion .joints: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. At curbs and gutters, furnish _ special section to meet local curb and gutter specifications. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove all loose material from the uniformly compacted subbase surface -- immediately before placing concrete. 5.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient lengths of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so _ that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Tops of walks shall slope at least 1 /5" per foot. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of form units: Not more than 1 /5" in 10 feet. 2. vertical face: Longitudinal axis, not more than 1 /4" to 10 feet. G. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form oil as often as required to — ensure separation from concrete without damage. 5.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 05510, Concrete Mork, for . mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specifled. SECTION 02514 PACvE 2 '- rr7 r i� CONCRETE JNALKS SECTION 02514 2. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade, Moisten suberade as required to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they.have been brought to the required grade and alignment. S. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix, and with as little rehandling as possible. Consolidate concrete along the - face of forms and adjacent to transverse Joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. Do not over vibrate. 4. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than A hour, place a construction joint. Sections less than 15 feet in length between transverse joints will not be permitted. Remove such sections if directed by the Architect. 5.04 JOINTS A. General: construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction), and construction joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of the concrete, unless otherwise shown. construct transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise shown. .5. weakened -Plane (GontractionjJoints: Provide weakened -plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on the Drawings. construct weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1 /4 concrete thickness as follows: c. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. D. construction Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours and at locations'where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2 hour, except where such pour terminates at expansion joints. 1. construct joints as shown, or if not shown, use standard metal keyway section forms. SECTION 02514 r t CONCRETE YSIALKS SECTION 02 514 E. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded Joint filler for expansion Joints abutting -- concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects. 1. Expansion Joints shall be at 20 feet OZ., unless otherwise shown. 2. Extend Joint fillers full -width and depth of Joint, and not less than 1/2" or more than 1 " below finished surface. Furnish Joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip Joint filler sections together. Form top edge of filler to conform to top profile of concrete. 5. Protect the top edge of the Joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after both sides of Joint are placed. 5.05 CONCRETE FINI5HING A. Finishes: Uniess indicated otherwise, items of concrete to be finished as follows: _ 1. All sidewalks, concrete aprons and porches shall have float finish, brushed as directed to provide non -slip finish. B. The following finishing procedures shall be observed: 1. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screeding and floating. rpo not use "Jitterbugs". Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust the floating to compact the surface and produce a uniform mixture. — 2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot straightedge: distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous, smooth finish. s. Work edges of slabs and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2" radius, unless otherwise shown. Eliminate any tool marks on concrete surface. 4. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared complete surface finishing as follows: SECTION 02514 PAGE 4 r i r i � r .n i t- ( t s SECTION 02514 a. Broom Finish: Broom finish, by drawing a fine broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation If required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to the Architect. b. On Inclining slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff -bristled broom. 5.06 GURINC-7 A. Protect and cure finished concrete walks, complying with the applicable requirements of Section 05510. Concrete Work. Use moist -curing methods whenever possible for first 24 hours then apply curing compound. 5.01 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION5 A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with polysulphide-epoxy binder, or with polysulphide resin grout, complying with F5 MMM-67-6 505 GANG. G. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffia.Is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and -spillage of materials as they occur. D. 5weep concrete walks free of stains, di5colorations, dirt and other foreign material ,Just prior to final inspection. End of Section This Section Prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. SECTION 02514 PACSE 5 { CONCRETE NORK 5E0TION 05 5 10 PART 1 6ENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary 'General conditions, Special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. 1.05 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete Walks - Section 02P 14 1.04 OVALiTY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards:. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. AV 501 "specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 504 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 5. ACI 51 1 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". 4. AV 515 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced concrete". S. ACI 541 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 6. M5P-1-a0 concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". B. Workmanship:. The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. correct deficient concrete as directed by the architect. t" SECTION 055 10 FAGS 1 ii ,j, CONC,RETE AORK SECTION 055 10 C. Design and Testing 1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. A proven, established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix. 2. .lob site cylinders shall be taken when the Architect so directs. The contractor shall notify the testing laboratory -when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and handling including breaking of same at laboratory. D. Concrete Testing Service: - Employ, at Contractor's expense a testing laboratory acceptable to Architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 1. Test results shall be furnished to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor. - 2. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect, at anytime during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the owner's expense, including the retesting of the rejected materials and installed work, shall r' be done at the contractor's expense. s, Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further tested. if further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the under strength concrete will be replaced with new as directed by Architect. _ E. Tests for concrete Materials 1. Test aggregate by method of sampling and testing of AipTM C SS. _ 2, For portland cement, sample the cement and determine the properties by the methods of test of A5TM C 150. - SECTION 055 10 PAaE 2 SECTION OSS 10 5. Submit written reports to the Architect, for each material sampled and tested, prior to the start of work. Provide the project identification name and number, date of report, name of contractor, name of concrete testing service, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer and brand name for manufactured materials, values specified in the referenced specification for each material, and test results. Indicate whether or not material is acceptable for intended use. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. shop Drawings: submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the AGi s 15 "Manual of standard Practice for detailing Reinforced Concrete structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART 2 PROVUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good -as -new". S. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product standard PS-1 " S-B (concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior crade'or better, mill -oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be r unexposed in finished structure with.plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. r V. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square spot footings are shown on the trawings. ;j SECTION 0.551 O PAGE S 1 CONCRETE WORK SECTION 055 10 2.02 REINFORCIN6 MATERIALS — A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615. Grade 66, except No. s ties and stirrups may be Grade 40. B. 5upports for Reinforcement 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers _ and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CR51, unless otherwise specified. P%ood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. s. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with fees which are hot/dip galvanized, or plastic protected or stainless steel protected. 2.05 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement 1 ASTM C 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise -- acceptable to Architect. B. Fine Aggregate — 1. clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, - lumps or other deleterious substances. 2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 55. clean, uncoated, processed aggregate — containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. SECTION 055 10 PA67E 4 CONGREi'E YVORK SECTION 055 10 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. 5. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of stabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles or bars. -b. These limitations may be waived If, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids. D. Fly Ash: ASTM G 615, Type C or Type F. E. Water: Glean, fresh, drinkable. F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM G 260, G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 4q4, Type A, containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. H. set -control Admixtures: A5TM C 4144, as follows: 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. ' S. Type b, Water -reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E. Water -reducing and Accelerating. I. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by Architect. J. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (super Plasticizer): A5TM C 4 q4, Type F or 0 containing not more than 0.'1 % chloride ions. 2.04 RELATED MATERIALS SECTION 055 10 FACE 5 7 CONCRETE YVORK SECTION 055 10 A. Preformed Expansion .Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber, saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, lh" thickness by depth of slab. B. .point Sealing Compound: See Division I sections. C. Absorptive cover: Burlap cloth made from Jute or kenaf, weighing approximately Q oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 162, Glass 2. D. Moisture -Retaining cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 111. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 5. Polyethylene -coated buriap. E. Membrane -Forming curing compound: ASTM C 50a, Type 1, Class A unless -- other type acceptable to the Architect. F. concrete Sealer: Acrylic co -polymer sealer equal to SealTite Tiah as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. The sealer shall not after -yellow or change the natural color of the concrete and shall provide a highly weatherproof, stain - resistant and dustproof sealer. 2.05 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the game as used for field quality control testing — unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial patch or field experience _ methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with AV 21 1.1. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, SECTION 05510 PAGE-6 CONCRETS WORK SECTION 0551 O as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 5000 psi �28-day compressive strength; YV/O ratio, 0.56 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air -entrained).. 2. See Section 02514 for additional requirements for concrete mix design for sftework concrete. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the contractor when characterlstics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work. 2.06 ADMIXTURES A. use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. S. use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 5o degrees F. . c. use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having sir content within the following limits: 1. s.s% with 1 h" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1 " maximum aggregate 5. 6.0% with 5/4" maximum aggregate 4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate D. use admixture for water -reducing and set -control In strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. E. use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of SECTION 05 510 PAGPE '1 admixtures as required to maintain quality control. -- 2.01 SLUMP LIMITS A. Proportion and design mixes .to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 5". 2. Reinforced Foundation 5y5tem5: Not less than 1" and not more than 5". 5, concrete containing HRINK admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2"-5" slump concrete. 4. All Other concrete: Not more than 4". 2.08 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mix concrete: comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. B. control of Mixing ►dater: Men concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, water may be added only if neither the maximum permissible water -cement ratio nor the maximum permissible slump 15 exceeded. The drum shall be turned an additional s0 revolutions, or more if necessary, until the added water Is uniformly mixed into the concrete. c. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified In ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and ao degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 1h hours to '15 minutes, and when the air temperature 15 above 90 degrees F., reduce the, mixing and delivery time to bo minutes. PART 5 EXECUTION "- 5.01 FORMS A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and SECTION 055 10 PAGE 5 CONCRETE WORK SECTION 05510 lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. - Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. S. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood Inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling. and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is Inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or '~ rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge Joints. G. Provisions for other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to d accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and r securely support items built into forms. H. Gleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to r receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust. dirt or other debris Just f before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. f' 5.02 PLACING REINFORCINS �t A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and concrete Reinforcing 5teel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing I:3ars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. r SECTION 05510 PAGE 9 CONCRETE WORK SECTION 055 10 B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials — which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. , 0. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement - by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties "- so ends are directed Into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Po not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous — bar supports. too not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. 5.05 JOINTS A. Construction Joints 1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Prawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect. 2. Provide keyways at least 1 1h" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for Blabs. S. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. _ Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. B. Control Joints in 51abs-on-Ground _ 1. Construct control joints In slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. use screed type joints equal to those manufactured by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. Screed Key joints are of 24 gauge galvanized steel with 1 1/5" dowel knockouts at 6" on centers. Install with a minimum of five special 16 gauge by 1" stakes per ten feet of length of material. If saw cut control joints are used, they shall be made with a power saw fitted with an abrasive or SECTION 055 10 PAGE 10 -- SECTION 055 10 diamond blade. saw cuts must be one-fourth the slab thickness. Sawing shall begin as soon as the concrete surface is firm enough so that it will not be torn or damaged by the blade. This will be within 4 to 12 hours after the concrete hardens. co. Isolation joints in slabs -on -Ground: 4onstruct isolation joints in slabs, on ground at,all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. 5.04 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported .by, F cast-in-place concrete. Use getting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the Items. to be attached thereto. S. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for 51abs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficlently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 5.05 PREPARATION OF FORM 5URFACES A. Goat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate In the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces, against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 5.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SECTION 055 10 PA67E 1 1 r CONCRETE WORK SECTION .03 3 10 A. General 1. Comply with AV 504, and as herein specified. 2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. s. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. C. Placing Concrete In Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 16" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. SECTION 055 10 N PACaE 12 r F� CONCRETE WORK SECTION 0S510 D. Placing Concrete slabs 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction Joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed..Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straiightedge and strike off. use bull floats or derbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the -slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 5. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. E. Cold weather Placing 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, In compliance with AG 506 and as herein specified. 2. when air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 60 degrees F., at point of placement. S. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing Ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt . and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted In mix designs. F. Hot weather Placing 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously Impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete In compliance with AU 505 and as herein specified. SECTION OS 3 10 PAC7E 15 CONCRETE WORK SECTION 055 10 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. S. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Y%et form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 3.0'7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This 1s the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as _ specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1 /4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. B.: Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is the as -cast concrete -- surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than the _ day after form removal. 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture Is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. c5rout Gleaned Finish: Provide grout cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces which have received smooth form finish treatment. 5ECTION 055 10 PAGE 14 l CONCRETE WORK SECTION 05 5 10 1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1 /2 parts fine sand by volume, and mix with water to the consistency of thick paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that the final color of dry grout will closely match adjacent surfaces. 2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout immediately to coat surfaces and fill small holes.' Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least s b hours after rubbing. I-. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. 5.05 MONOLITHIC SLAB FiNISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to rreceive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile or other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as shown on the Drawings. 1. After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding +h" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic roofing, and as shown on, the Drawings or In schedules. 1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or lnaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1 /4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to SECTION 05 5 10 PAC7E 15 J CONCRETE VIORK SECTION OES 10 drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, — granular texture. C. Trowel Finish 1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed -to -view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to _ be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin film finish coating system. 2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1 /8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. &rind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Non -slip Broom Finish 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before application. 8.09 CONCRETE CURIN& AND PROTECTION A. General 1. Protect freshly piaced concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 12 hours. — SECTION 055 10 PAGE 16. - CONCRETE YiORK SECTION 055 10 S. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. 5. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinatlons thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: e. a. Keep concrete surface contlnuously wet by covering with water. Continuous, water -fog spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specifled absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Piave absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 5" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. S. Provide curing compound for slabs as foilow5: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete 51abs-a5 soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 5 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing period. a. no not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be i^ covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor . hardener, waterproof Ing,'dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, SECTION 05 5 10 FA65 1 'T CONCRETE WORK SECTION 055 10 painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise -- acceptable to Architect. c. curing Formed surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms In place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. V. curing Unformed surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. E. Applying concrete sealer: Apply on all concrete slab floors scheduled to be left exposed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. concrete shall have cured for a least I days. 2. concrete shall be clean and dry prior to application, with oil stains; grease, etc. removed. 5. Apply by spray, brush, or iamb's wool applicator to approximate coverage of Boo square. feet per gallon. -- 4. no no apply if the temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 5.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than So degrees ft. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing -- material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. SECTION 055 10 PAGE 15 CONCRETE JNORK SECTION OS 10 S.1 1 RE -USE OF FORMS - A. Glean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. Ahen forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close ,Joints. Align and secure ,Joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Architect. 15.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS : A. Filling -in: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel -troweling surfaces to a herd, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded. C. Reinforced Masonry: Provide grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during grout placement. 5.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas 1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to Architect. 2. Gut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1 /4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of legs than 1 ". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding SECTION 05 5 10 PA.GE 1 q I CONCRETE WORK SECTION 055 10 agent. 9. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding _ surface. B. Repair of Formed surfaces 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to'satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, Include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spells, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and.other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. if defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. c. Repair of Unformed Surfaces 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finlsh. correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01 " wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. s. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. SECTION 05 5 10 FAC7E 20 CONCRETE WORK SECTION 05 5 10 r 4. Correct low areas In unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend Into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Architects. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 " diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 5/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finlshed concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 6, Repair Isolated random cracks and single holes not over i " in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 ,/2parts flue aggregate passing a No. 1 6 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist .for not less than 'i 2 hours. D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by Architect. E. Repair methods not speclfied above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. 5.14 QUALITY CONTROL TE5TiN6 DURIN6 CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports. S. 5ampiing and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may Include the following, as directed by the Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 112, except modified for slump to SECTION 055 10 PA67S 2 1 r CONCRETE WORK SECTION 055 10 comply with ASTM C R4. 2. Slump: ASTM C. 145; One test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of discharge. 5. Air Content: ASTM C 1 '15, volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM Co 251 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 60 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. S. compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 5 1; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. 6. Compressive strength Tests: A5TM Co 5 ci; one set for each 100 au, yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at '1 days for information only; 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing .. if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 26 days. a. when the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. when the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the. Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. c. when the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 65% of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete. G. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the contractor on the same day" that tests are made. Reports of compressive SECTION 055 10 PASE 2 2 -' strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch.in the structure, design compressive strength at 26 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 'T-day tests and 26-day tests. V. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C. 42, or by other methods l l as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. j" ,t End of Section This Section Prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. i r �i SECTION 055 10 r PAGE 25 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements appiy to the work of this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES, A. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units. B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.05 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04250 - Reinforced Unit Masonry S. Section O? 1 'T 5 - dater Repellant Coating. C. Section 0*7 a00 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealantat control ,Joints. 1.04 REFERP_NCES A. ANSI/ASTM A52 - Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. i B. ANSI/ASTM C:� 16 Facing Brick. r C. ASTM A 125 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. D. ASTM Al 6*7 - 5tainles5 and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel 5teei Plate. E. ASTM A525 - steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. F. ASTM AS50 - Stalnless and Heat -Resisting Steel Wire. G. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. t H. ASTM Ca0 - Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. I. ASTM C 1 29 - Non -Load Bearing concrete Masonry Units. J. ASTM C 145 - Solid Load Bearing Concrete Maso y Units. I' K. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories. L f SECTION 04200 PAGE 1 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Manufacturer's standard printed installation Instructions. .5. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certification that products meet or exceed _ 5peclfled requirements. C. samples 1. Submit four samples of decorative concrete masonry units to Illustrate color, texture and color ranges. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer 1. Company Specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 dears documented experience. S. Mock up 1. Provide mock up of masonry wall construction. 2. Erect units to 5 feet X 4 feet panel size, include specified mortar and accessories. 5, when accepted, mock up will demonstrate minimum standard for the work. Mock up may not remain as part of the Work. _ 1.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials off ground and protected from wetting by capillary action, rain or snow and protected from mud, dust or other material likely to cause staining or 'defect5. B. Handle materials carefully to avoid chipping and breaking. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Hot Weather Requirements SECTION 04200 PACSS 2 UNIT MASONRY SYSTaM SECTION 04200 e. Protect all masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun for 48 hours after erection when ambient air temperature exceeds 9 9 F. and when shaded with relative humidity less than 50%. b. Provide suitable coverings or barriers to deflect direct sunlight and wind. B. Gold Weather Requirements 1. Keep masonry units and substrate to receive masonry construction free of frost, ice and snow at all times. ` 2. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 'i0c F. and 1 101 F. Po not exceed 1600 F. for temperature of water or sand introduced to cement. 5. Maintain masonry units at a minimum temperature of 500 F. when laying. , 4. Maintain air temperature on both sides of masonry above 400 F. for 72 hours, 48 hours if high -early -strength cement is used in lieu of portland or masonry cement. S. Do not lay masonry at temperatures below 500 F. PART 2. PROPUCTS r`, 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. decorative Concrete Masonry units (CMU) d Colored Solid units 1. Featherlite Building Products Corp., Lubbock, Texas 2.02 MATERIALS A. Concrete Masonry units j 1. General a. Nominal modular size of 6 inch, width x 8 inch, height x 16 inch, iength. Provide special units for QO degree corners, bond beams and lintels. Colors as Selected by the Architect. b. solid Gap Unit: Modular size of 8 inch, width.X 2 inch, height X 16 inch, length. Colors as Selected by the Architect. b. units exposed to view shall be free of chipped corners, edges and field voids. F SECTION 04200 PAGE 3 ,E UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 2. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, 6rade N, Type 1 - Moisture Controlled; normal weight. B. Reinforcement and anchorage 1. single Wythe .Joint Reinforcement: 'Truss type; hot dip galvanized after fabrication from cold -drawn deformed steel conforming to AN51/ASTM A52, s/ 16 inch cross ties. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section OS 10. C. accessgries 1. Preformed Control .Joints: Rubber Neoprene material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, cement fused ,joints. �= 2. Joint Filler: Closed cell poiyurethane; oversized 50 percent to ,Joint width; self -expanding; width required by maximum lengths. 5. Building Paper: #50 asphalt saturated felt. 4. Nailing Strips: Softwood, preservative treated for moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry joints. S. Cleaning Solutions: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXE5 A. Proportions 1. Mortar mixes: Conform to ASTM C210, and the following: a. Type "5" Mortar for all masonry. One part Portland Cement, 1�4 to 1/2parts damp, loose sand or 1/2part Portland Cement, 1 part masonry cement, 5- 5/6 to 41h parts damp, loose sand. 2. Masonry Grout Mix: Conform to ASTM C4i6 and the following for coarse r grout: a. one part Portland Cement, 0 to 1 / 10 part hydrated lime, 21i< to 5 parts damp, loose sand, 1 to 2 parts coarse aggregate. - b. Meet physical requirements for grout as Specified in ASTM C T6. c. 6rout for filling of reinforced cells in concrete block wails shall have a strength of 2500 pounds per square inch in 25 days. , S. Measuring SECTION 04 200 PAGE 4 f UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 1. Accurately measure ingredients, including water, using measuring devices of .. 4 known volume: 2. Do not. use shovel as measuring device. C. Mixing 1. Use mechanical mixing equipment designed for purpose intended. 2. Use minimum amount of water required to produce workable consistency. s: Mix materials for a minimum of three minutes or until mix presents a uniform color. D. Masonry Mortar Color: As selected by the Architect. PART 3. EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B.. Verify Items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in Items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work, V. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 5.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied by other Sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during Installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 5.05 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. 2. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. SECTION 04200 FACIE 5 r UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 5. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form concave mortar joints. 4. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 5. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 6. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses. '7. Interlock intersections and external corners. 8. Vo not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. a. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 10. Out mortar joints flush where resilient base is scheduled or bitumen dampproofing is applied. 1 1. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as indicated. 12. isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and Blabs or decks with compressible joint filler. 15. install weep holes in veneer at 46 inches on center horizontally above through -wall flashing, above shelf angles, and at bottom of walls. B. Reinforcement and Anchorages - Single Wythe Masonry I. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches o.c. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. s. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of openings. C. Grouted Components 1. Reinforce bond beam as indicated on the drawings. SECTION 04200 PAGE 6 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 2. Support and secure reinforcing bars from 'dispiaaement. Maintain position within ,h inch of' dimensioned position. s. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 4. 1 At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 8 inches either side of opening. S. Lay masonry units with core cells vertically aligned and cavities between wythes clear of mortar and unobstructed. 7" b. Place mortar in masonry unit bed joints back 1 /4 inch from edge of unit grout 4 , spaces, bevel back and upward. Permit mortar to cure -1 days before placing grout. 1. Reinforce masonry unit cores and cavities with reinforcement bars and grout as indicated. 6. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at Intervals not exceeding 1912 bar diameters. Splice reinforcement in accordance with Section 08 51.0. 9. Wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout just prior to grout placement. 10. Grout spaces less than 2 inches in width with fine grout using low lift grouting techniques. Grout spaces 2 inches or greater in width with course grout using high or low Iift grouting techniques. 1 1. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 11h inch below top of upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement. 12. Low Lift Grouting: Place first lift of grout to a height of 16 inches and rod for grout consolidation. Place subsequent lifts in 8 inch increments and rod for grout consolidation. 15. High Lift Grouting: Provide cleanout opening no less than 4 inches high at the bottom of each cell to be grouted by cutting one face shell of masonry unit. 14. Glean out masonry cells and cavities with high pressure water spray. Permit complete water drainage. 15. Request the Architect to inspect the cells and cavities. Allow s days advance notice of inspection. r4 I SECTION 04200 PA&E 1 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 16. After cleaning and cell inspection, seal openings with masonry units. 11. Pump grout into spaces. Maintain water content in grout to intended slump without aggregate segregation. 16. Limit grout lift to 46 inches and rod for grout consolidation. )tact 5o to 6o minutes before placing next lift. V. Control and Expansion .Joints 1. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. 2. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. S. Size control joint In accordance with Section 0'19o0 for sealant performance. _ 4. Form expansion joint as detailed. E. Built-in )cork 1. As work progresses, build In metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates and other Items furnished by other Sections. 2. Build in items plumb and level. s. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fiil frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 8 inches from framed openings. 4. r Do not build in organic materials subject to .deterioration. ✓ F. Tolerances 1. Maximum Variation From Alignment of columns: Pilasters: 1 %4 Inch. `J 2. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1 /52 inch. S. Maximum Variation From Plane of )tall: 114 inch in 10 feet and 1h inch in 20 feet or more. 4. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 114 inch per story non -cumulative. SECTION 04200 FACIE 5 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 S. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1 /6 inch in 5 feet and 1 /4 inch in 10 feet; A inch in so feet. 6. . Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1 /8 inch in 5 feet. I. Maximum Variation From Gross Sectional Thickness of Wails: 1 /4 inch. 6. Cutting and Fitting 1. Cut and fit for pipes, conduit, sleeves. grounds, and other appurtenances. coordinate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. a. obtain contractor or Owner approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. '5.04 ADJiJSTIN6 AN17 CLEANiN6 A. Glean work as required to remove excess mortar and mortar smears. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. P. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. E. Remove and replace all masonry units which are chipped, broken or cracked beyond repair. 5.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. End of Section SECTION 04200 PAGE q REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SECTION 042SO G PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS { A. The general provisions of the Contract, including 6enerai 'Conditions, Supplementary 6enerai Conditions, Special Conditions and . 6eneral r.. Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. p ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on Drawings and In schedules. Requirements of Section 04200, Unit Masonry, apply to work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars. comply with the AG 515 "Manual of standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. j� PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for masonry materials and accessories not included in this section. B. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 615 and as follows: 1. Provide Grade 60, except that No. s ties and stirrups may be Grade 40. 2. Where No. 2 bars are shown, provide plain, round, carbon steel bars, A5TM A 615, 6rade 50. S. Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. SECTION 04250 PAGE 1 l! REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04'250 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PLACIN& REINFORCING A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars With kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or final shop drawings, or, bars With reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. 8. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1 " (whichever is greater). c. For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as shown, but not less than 1 ,,z times the nominal bar diameter or 1 1/21' , whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties as shown. D. Spiice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the Architect. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise shown. in spliaing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, Lap ends, place In contact and wire tie. E. Provide not less than minimum lap shown, or if not shown, as required by governing code. F. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 5/6" on exterior face of walls and 1h" at other locations. G. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcing as the work progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/5" on exterior face of walWand 1h" at other locations. Lap units not less than 6" at ends. use prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at corners and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. H. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structures as indicated. 5.02 INSTALLATION, &ENERAL SECTION 04250 P,4GE 2. r r ' ' REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY C' SECTION 04250 r" A. Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for. general Installation requirements of unit masonry. r► 5. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, ` brace and maintain formwork. r" G. construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. r E. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of the j member before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period. 1. 10 days for girders and beams. 5.05 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MA50NRY r A. General 1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head ,Joints (end ,Joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shelis. 5olidiy bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 5/8" ,Joints. 5. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed joints. 5. Walls 1. Pattern 5ond: Lay cMU wall units in'h running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless SECTION 04250 PAGE 5 a REINFORCEP UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04250 otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course_ at corners and intersections. Use special -shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, Jambs, sash, control Joints, lintels, bond beams ,and other special conditions. 2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions Indicated _ and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. S. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcing bare. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. G. Grouting 1. Use "Fine Grout" for filling spaces less than 4" in both horizontal directions. 2. Use "Co arse Grout" for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. D. Grouting Technique: Use low -lift grouting techniques Subject to the requirements which follow. E. Low -Lift Grouting 1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 6 sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted. 2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 1 a 2 bar diameters nor 1 Of eet. 5. Lay GMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below 5 feet, height, stop pour at course below bond -- beam. SECTION 04250 PAGE 4 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04250 4. Pour grout using container with spout or by chute. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not Interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout.pours 1 1h" below top course of pour. S. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1 1h" below bond beam course. ,. Place horizontal reinforcing In bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout In bond beam course before filling vertical'cores above bond beam. F. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, Inspect and clean grout l spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. clean reinforcing and adjust to proper position. clean top surfaces of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout r holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures. { G. Grout Placing Leo not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. install shores and bracing., If required, before starting grouting operations. 2. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable 'to the Architect. e. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed S feet. Allow not- less than So minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation. 4. where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to within 1 " of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. 5. when more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1 1h" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second r' SECTION 04250 FA&E 5 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04250 pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. End of Section This Section Prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Ina. SECTION 04250 PA67E 6 S j METAL F,A51RICATIONS SECTION 05500 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS !�. The general provisions of the Contract, including General conditions, Supplementary General conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work -specified in this section. 1.62 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of miscellaneous metal work is shown on drawings and includes wide flange beams, items fabricated from metal shapes, plates, tube steel, angles, lintels and pipe which are not a part of other metal systems in other sections of these specifications. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay Job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must, be set in concrete for installation of miscellaneous metal work. Provide setting drawing$, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. c. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possibly to r-► minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data, Miscellaneous Metal: For information'only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and Installation instructions for products to be used in the fabrication of miscellaneous metal work. Including paint products. Indicate by transmittal that copy of instructions has been distributed to Installer. B. shop Drawings, Miscellaneous Metal: Submit 5 copies of shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal assemblies. Include plans, elevations, details, sections and connections. Show anchorages and accessory Items. SE.CTION 05500 PAGE 1 METAL FAI51RICATIONS SECTION_05500 , PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metalwork which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade. names and roughness. B. Structural wide Flange Beams, Steel Plates, Shapes, Angle Lintels, Tube Steel and ` Bars: ASTM A56. 1. Items to include but are not limited to the following: Materials associated with decorative gates, fencing,. stair pipe handrail and wall brackets, steel tube lattice work, decorative metal sun screen awning work and concession stand opening mesh screening. C. Primer: SSPC Paint 2-64; or basic silica chromate base iron oxide, linseed oil, alkyd paint, FS TT-P-61 5, Type II. 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. workmanship: use materials of size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. use type of materials shown or specified for various components -of work. B. Form exposed work true to line and level accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 /52" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. C. weld corners and seams Continuously, complying with Aw5 Recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. V. Form exposed connections with hairline Joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. use exposed fasteners of type shown, or if not shown, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. E. 'Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting Structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide .— adequate support for Intended use. SECTION 05500 FAGS 2 r• METAL FABRICATIONS 1 SECTION 05 500 F. Gut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to receive finish hardware and similar items. 0.. shop Painting: Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise specified. Primer must be compatible with finish coats of paint. H. Remove scale, rust and other deieterious materials before Applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with S5PC 5P-2 "Hand Tool Gleaning: or 55PG 5P-5 "Power Tool Gleaning;, or 55PC 5P-'7 "Brush -Off Blast Gleaning." I. Remove oil, grease and simiiar contaminants in accordance with 55PS 5P-I "Solvent Gleaning." J. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. use painting methods which will result in full coverage of Joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. K. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS A. Miscellaneous Framing and supports: Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. r S. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. r Co. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates and minimum joints for field connection. cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 2.04 MESH SCREENING - LOCATED AT CONCESSION STAND KNDONI OPENING A. Equai to an insect screening of black vinyl coated 1 &/ 16 mesh fiberglass screen cloth complying with F5 L-5-1258 and ANSI-5MA-1 OQ4, set in an aluminum frame fitted to hollow metal frame opening and held in place by a 5/4" X 5/4" hollow metal glazing stop. contractors option to provide in lieu of fiberglass screen an aluminum or steel mesh insect screening complying with the same requirements. 9 SECTION 05500 PAGE 5 r METAL FAZRICATIONS SECTION 05 500 PART 8 EXECUTION 5.02 INSTALLATION h Anchorages: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete construction. coordinate delivery of such items to project site. ` 5. Fastening to In -Place construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal items to in -place constructions; including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, screws and other connectors as required. C. Gutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. Set work accurately in location alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. yield connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded —` because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop'paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted.or screwed field connections. E. Field yielding: Comply with AWS code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. F. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. End of Section SECTION 05 500 FAaE 4 PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATEP VOCUMENTS �! A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary 1 General Conditions, 5peciai Gonditions and General Requirements (Vivision 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DE5CRIPTION OF WORK A. carpentry work includes carpentry not specified as a part of other sections of these specifications and which generally is not exposed to view unless otherwise detailed or scheduled. Work under this section includes: 1. Wood Grounds, Nailers and Blocking 2.5tud wall framing, wood floor and roof framing members, and fascia framing. S. Plywood wall surfacing, telling, soffit and roof decking. 4. Gypsum sheathing Board: 1.05 GiUALITY A55URANCE A. Lumber standards: comply with P5 20 and with the applicable rules of the respective grading and inspecting agencies for species and products indicated. 5. Identification: Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit , mill certificate that materials have been inspected and graded in accordance with grading standards if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface, C. Product Handling: Keep materials dry during delivery, storage and handling. Store lumber and plywood in stacks with provision for air circulation. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp surfaces. Protect exposed materials from weather. V. coordination: Coordinate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports so that attached work will comply with design requirements. E. Plywood Standard: comply with PS 1, except as otherwise indicated. F. Provide plywood of any P5 1 species classification group, except where particular species is shown or specified or where P5 1 limits groups for a particular grade specified. C' SECTION 06 100 PAGE 1 CARPENTRY ViORK SECTION 06 100 6. Factory -mark each piece of lumber and plywood to identify the type, grade, agency providing the inspection service, the producing mill and other qualities as specified _ herein. H. Marking may be omitted if certificate of inspection is provide for each shipment. omit markings and provide certificate of inspection for material shown or scheduled ` to receive transparent or natural finish if markings would be visible after finishing. I. Shop -fabricate carpentry work to the extent feasible and where shop fabrication will result in better workmanship than feasible for on -site fabrication. J. Fit carpentry work to other work. Scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. K. Time delivery and installation of carpentry work to avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent on or affected by the carpentry work and to comply with protection and storage requirements. L. Keep carpentry materials dry during delivery. Store lumber and plywood In stacks with provision for air circulation within stacks. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp or wet surfaces. Protect exposed materials against weather. M. Vo not store dressed or treated lumber or plywood outdoors. N. store materials for which a maximum moisture content is specified, only In areas where relative humidity has been reduced to a level where specified moisture content _ can be maintained with a tolerance of plus or minus 19'a. o. Advise contractor of heating or cooling requirements for installation areas and for maintaining required temperature until owner's acceptance of the work. P. Veliver, store and handle exterior gypsum sheathing in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 1.04 REFERENCE 5TANDAKDS A. Western Wood Products Association, "Grading Rules for Western Lumber". B. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine . Lumber". C. Product Standard of N55, "Product Standard P5-166 for softwood Plywood/construction and Industrial". V. Architectural Woodwork Institute (ANQ "Quality standards". 1.05 SUBMITTALS SECTION 06 100 PAGE 2 A. For Information only, submit 2 copies of chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for proper use of each type of treated material. Indicate by transmittal form that copy of each Instruction has bee distributed to the Installer. 1.06 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Stack framing lumber and plywood to insure ventilation and insure against damage from moisture and the elements. Protect millwork and flooring against dampness during and after delivery. Store under cover In a well ventilated building and where not exposed to changes of temperature and humidity. Do not store or install any framing until masonry work Is dry. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY, FRAMING MATERIALS A14D COMPONENTS A. Lumber: Graded In accordance with established Grading rules: Maximum moisture content of 12 per cent; of following species and grades: 1. Non-structural light framing: stress group A; standard grade. 2. Structural framing: stress group A; superior grade. a. Structural framing shall be wood species Douglas Fir Large or Southern Pine No. 2 or Better. B. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood: plain finish for other Interior locations; size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, nuts, washers, lags, pins and screws: Medium carbon steel; sized to suit application galvanized for exterior locations; high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other Interior locations. D. Fasteners: 1. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. 2. Nails s and staples: Fs FF-N-105, S. Tacks: Fs FF-N-105. 4. Nood Screws: F5 FF-S-III. S. Bolts and Studs: Fs FF-B-S'15: 6. Nuts: FS FF-N-856. fi . I SECTION 06 100 PAGE 5 r CARPENTRY FiORK SECTION O6 100 "I. Washers: F5 FF-W-q2. 5. Lag screws or Lag Bolts: F5 FF-5-56 1. a. Expansion Shields, Expansion Nails and 1Drive Screw Devices: FS FF-5-525. 10. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-555 1 1. Bar or Strap Anchors: ASTM A 5'75 carbon steel bars. 12. Simpson Strong Tie connectors: a. Type H6 at stud to top plate and stud to floor framing connection and Type ~ H'1 at stud to rafter connection. b. 1-1 /4 inch X 16 gauge 'X, bracing at 5'-0" on center from top.piate to floor framing. E. Plywood exposed on interior: 1. Smooth surface to Receive Paint Finish. 2. Interior Type Plywood, A Grade on Exposed Face, G or a Grade on Gonceaied Face., F. Plywood Exposed or not exposed Faces in the following places (i.e. roof decking at trusses, stairway and press box. 1. Grade equal to avx 6: Plywood Exposed to Exterior at Soffit: 1. Smooth Surface to Receive Paint Finish. 2. Exterior Type Plywood, A Grade on Exposed Face, G Grade on concealed Face. H. Grounds and Nailers: No. 1, KD, Southern Yellow Pine, or No. 1, Douglas Fir -Larch, 1 9% maximum M.G. I. Floor necking at Press Box Area: Equal to 1 or 1-1 /8 inch, tongue and grooved Sturdy Floor as manufactured by international Paper. J. byp5um Board Sheathing 1. 6yp5um Sheathing Board: AN51/A5TM G'l9; moisture resistant and fire resistant - type; 1h inch thick nominal, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tongue and grooved edges; water repellent paper faces. SECTION 06 100 PACGE 4 CARPENTRY NORK SECTION 06100 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. Installer must examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the carpentry work is to be installed, and notify the contractor in writing of aMW conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 5.02 GUTTING AND PATCHING A. contractor shall perform such work in his line as is usually required for plumbing, heating, electrical or other mechanics. He shall also furnish, of required sizes and forms, all furring at otherwise shown or specified, rough brackets, forms, etc., as required to properly carry out the intent of the work as shown by drawings and specifications. 5.05 GUARDS, RUNWAY5 AND LADDERS A. Furnish, set and maintain substantial hoist ways, runways, or ladders leading from lowest level of building to roof, and serving conveniently for general use of all workmen. Provide all temporary work necessary for proper executlon of this work. 5.04 TEMPORARY CLOSURE5 A. Protect all door openings, and other openings except windows when so required, with temporary batten doors, in plastered portions where weather conditions require. 5.05 INSTALLATION OF CABINET WORK VW A. Set and secure cabinet work in place rigid, plumb and square. B. use purpose designed fixture attachments for mounted components. 1 C. counter -sink semi -concealed anchorage devices used to wall mount components and conceal with solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood. Place flush with surrounding surfaces. D. carefully scribe cabinet work which is against other building materials; leaving gaps of 1 /52 inch maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. ¢ E. Install and adjust cabinet hardware to correct operation. F. Install hardware and accessories supplied under other sections for installation. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. f SECTION 06 100 PAGE 5 r" CARPENTRY WORK SECTION 06 1.00 cs. Ensure that mechanical and electrical items affecting this Section of work are properly placed, complete, and have been Inspected by the Architect prior to commencement of installation. 5.06 INSTALLATION OF FRAMING, FURRING AND 5TRIPPIN6 A. Erect wood framing, furring stripping and nailing members true to lines and levels. Do. not deviate from true alignment more than 1 /4 inch. B. Space members at 16" on center or as indicated. G. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. ., D. Provide wood grounds and blocking of size and shape required for 'securing toilet accessories, finish hardware, door stops and trim for chalkboards, thckboards, etc. _ Install true to line, level, plumb, and well secured in place. Wood blocking or nailer5 on drywall metal framing systems shall be bolted in place. E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards using products equai to Simpson Strong Tie: 1. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts in contact with wood. 2. Nail plywood to comply with the recommendations of the American Piywood A550clation. 5. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. F. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with the recommendations of the "Manual for House Framing" of the National Forest Products Association. Gut, join and tightly fit framing around other work. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise detailed. 6. Anchor and nail as shown, or if not shown, to comply with the "Recommended Nailing Schedule - Table 1 of the "Manual for House Framing" and other recommendations of the National Forest Products Association. 5.01 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 21,6. S. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. C. Use screws when fastening gypsum board wherever possible. SECTION 06 100 PAGE 6 r CARPENTRY YXORK SECTION 06 100 P. Treat cut edges and holes In moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. Treat or tape all jointing. 3.08 PROTECTION R. The contractor shall do all work necessary to cover and protect all masonry window sills and metal and wood door jambs and protect all new carpentry work or material from damage of any character. S. ,any work damaged through neglect of above causes or by any other means shall be. replaced by contractor without additional cost to the owner. End of Section SECTION 06100 PA&E '1 7 r i PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES SECTION 061 q 2 PART 1 - 6ENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary 6eneral conditions, Special Conditions and 6eneral Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. Extent and configuration of prefabricated wood trusses is indicated on the Structural Drawings, sheet 5-5. B. Types of prefabricated wood trusses include: 1. Open -Web Special Profile Trusses. C. Roof sheathing is specified in Section 06 100 "Carpentry Work". D. Wood trusses connected by plywood gussets, wood trusses with wood flanges and glued plywood webs, and wood trusses with wood flanges and metal web members are not included in this specification. Such trusses maybe used if the Contractor can prove that the products have been designed and tested to support the required loads. Contractor shall get approval from the architect to use these trusses prior to submitting a bid. 1.05 DEFINITI0145: A. Prefabricated wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal plate connected members which are fabricated from dimension lumber and which have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the project site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit fabricator's technical data covering lumber, metal plates, hardware, fabrication process, treatment (if any), handling and erection. 1. Submit certificate, signed by an officer of fabricating firm, indicating that trusses to be supplied for project comply with indicated requirements. SECTION 061 9 2 PA6E 1 r 1.05 PREF,ASRICATEP 1NOOV TRUSSES SECTION 06 1 9 2 15. Shop : submit shop drawings showing species, sizes and street grades of lumber to be used; pitch, span, camber, configuration and spacing for each type of truss required; type, size, material, finish, design values, location of metal connector plates; and bearing and anchorage details. 1. To the extent engineering design considerations are indicated as fabricator's responsibility, submit design analysis and test reports indicating loading, section modulus, assumed allowable stress, stress diagrams and calculations, and similar information needed for analysis and to ensure that trusses comply with requirements. 2. Provide shop drawings which' have been signed and stamped by a structural engineer licensed to practice in TEXAS. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. TPI Standards: comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications: 1. "design Speclfication for Metal Plate Connected wood Trusses". 2. "design specification for Metal Plate connected Parallel chord wood Trusses". S. "commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting wood Trusses". 4. "commentary and Recommendations for Bracing wood Trusses". 5. "Quality standard for Metal Plate connected wood,Trusse5% B. lgood Structural design Standard: comply with applicable requirements of "National resign specification for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement", published by A.F.P.A. C. design by Manufacturer: Trusses shall be designed by connector- piate manufacturer to support all superimposed dead and live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a structural engineer licensed to practice in TEXAS. V. connector Plate Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide truss connector plates manufactured by a firm which is a member of TPI and which complies with TPI quality control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI "Quality standard for Metal SECTION 06 1 9 2 F A.6E 2 Plate Connected wood Trusses". 1. E. Fabricator's Qualifications: Provide trusses by a firm which has a record of successfully fabricating trusses similtir to type indicated and which complies with the following requirements for quality control: 1. Fabricator participates in TPI "Guality Assurance inspection Program" as a licensee authorized to apply TPI marks to trusses. 2. Fabricator practices a quality control program which complies with, or -is comparable to, one published in TPI "Guallty Standard for Metal Plate Connected wood Trusses" and which involves inspection by an Independent inspection and testing agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. F. Single 5ource Responsibility for Connector. Plates: Provide metal connector plates from.a single manufacturer. 1.06 VELiVERY, STORAGE ANP HAN7LIN6t A. Handle and store trusses with care, and in accordance with r' manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or other cause for which truss Is not designed to resist or endure. B. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on -site storage and to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PART 2 - PROPUGT5 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal connector plates which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Computrus Inc. S. Mitek Industries, Inc. 4. Robbins Manufacturing Co. SECTION 06 1 9 2 PACGE 5 0 FREFABRIGRTEV INOOV TRUSSES SECTION 06 1 9 2 5. Tee-Lok Corp. 6. Truswal Systems Corp. 2.02 LUMBER: A. Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency. B. Lumber standard: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of Inspection agencies certified. by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSW Board of Review. C. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them to lumber grades and species include the following: 1. N1.6A - National Lumber 6rade5 Authority (Canadian). 2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. IN01.18 - West coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. ININPA - We5terri Wood Products Association, D. Provide lumber manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC P5 20 to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Dressed, 54S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Moisture Content: Seasoned, with 1 Q percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2" or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding allowable design values according to AFPA's "National Design Specification for Wood construction~ and its ,Suppiement^. 2.05 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES, FASTENERS AND ANCRORAGE5: A. connector Plates: Fabricate connector plates from metal compiying with the following requirements: 1. Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: Structural (physical) quality steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, 6rade'A; zinc coated by hot -dip process to comply. with ASTM A 525, Designation 660; minimum coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.056". SECTION 06 1 9 2 FA6E 4 E PREFA5RICATEs7 W OOV TRUSSES SECTION O6 1 9 2 2. Electrolytic Zinc -coated Steel Sheet: Structural (physical Quality steel sheet complying with A5TM A 59 1, Coating class c, and, for structural properties, with A5TM A 446, 6rade A; zinc -coated by electro-deposition; with minimum coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.049". S. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -coated Steel sheet: Structural (physical) quality steel sheet complying with A5TM A i 9 2, coating Designation AZ 50, and, for structural properties, with ASTM A 446, Grade A; aluminum - zinc alloy -coated by hot -dip process; with minimum coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.056". t 4. Stainless steel sheet complying with A5TM A 161 and, for structural properties, with A5TM A 446, 6rade A; with minimum metal thickness Indicated but not less than 0,055". 5. Any metal indicated above. B. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish Indicated for nails, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and other anchoring devices. 2.04 FABRICATION: A. cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles and sizes to produce close fitting Joints with wood -to -wood bearing in assembled units. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness and anchorage details required for types of Joint designs indicated. C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using Jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with close fitting Joints. Position. members to produce design camber indicated. D. connect truss members by means of metal connector plates accurately located and secureiy fastened to each side of wood members by means indicated or approved. PART 5 - EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of manufacturer and the Truss Plate institute. SECTION 061 9 2 PA6E 5 I. PREFABRICATEV YVOOn TRUSSES SECTION 06 1 q 2 5. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located accurately at design spacings indicated. C. Hoist units in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out -of -plane bending or other causes. D. Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location indicated, until permanent bracing is installed. E. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated. F. Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to. maintain design spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other indicated requirements. 0. Do not cut or remove truss members. END OF SECTION 061 q 2 '- This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. SECTION 06 1 q 2 PA&S 6 ARGHITEGTURAL 1NOOPAORK SECTiON 06 400 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED VOGUMENT5 A. - The general provisions of the contract, including General conditions, Supplementary General conditions, Special conditions and General Requirements (aivision 1), apply to the work specified In this section. 1.02 VESGRiPTION OF WORK A. The extent of each type of architectural woodwork 15 shown on the Drawings and in schedules. B. "Architectural Woodwork" is defined to include (in addition to items so designated on the drawings) all miscellaneous exposed wood members commonly known as Finish carpentry or Millwork, unless such items are specified under another section of these specifications. C. The types of architectural woodwork include, but are not necessarlly limited to the foilowing: 1.6asework for laminate and melamine finish. 2.Plastic laminate (casework). 5.5tanding and running trim for paint finish. 4.Wood shelving for paint finish. 1.65 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with specified provisions of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AN) "Quality standards." B. The approved woodwork manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have suaaessfuily completed comparable work. The Architect reserves the right to approve the woodwork manufacturer selected to furnish all of the woodwork.- 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. SECTION 06400 PAGE 1 IN ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 06400 B. Submit samples of each specie which Is to receive transparent finish at Job site, as requested by the Architect. C. Submit full range of samples of each type of laminated plastic specified for color and/or pattern selection. 1.05 FIELD T71MEN510N5 A. The woodwork manufacturer Is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by Job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings All required field measurements beyond his control. The general contractor and the woodwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, 5TORh6E AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage,Boil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored In other than installation areas, store only in areas which meet the requirements 5pecified for installation areas. 1.0'1 ' JOB 0ONDITION5 A. Examination of Substrate and Conditlon5: The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the work under this section 15 to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work under this section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork Installation areas. Do not install woodwork until the required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized in installation areas. p. Maintain temperature and relative humidity as required for a tolerance of plus or minus 1 °Yo of the 5pecified optimum moisture content until woodwork receives 5pecified finishes. Maintain temperature and humldity eonditions until acceptance of the work by the Owner. D. Protect Instailed woodwork from damage by other trades until Owner's SECTION 06400 PAGE 2 r AF-CHITEGTUKAL iNOOPNORK SECTION 06400 acceptance of -the work. Advise contractor of required protection procedures.. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. casework and shelving for paint finish. 1.AWI Section 400 2.AWI quality - austom grade S.Palnt Grade birch veneer plywood and birch trim 8. Plastic laminate for counter tops, casework and trim: 1.comply with the requirements of "Publication No. LDI" by the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) for the following: a. Horizontal Surfaces: NEMA General -Purpose Type, nominal 0.050" thickness. b. Post -Formed Surfaces: NEMA Post -Forming Type, nominal 0.042" thickness.. c. Vertical Surfaces: NEMA Vertical -Surface Type, nominal 0.050" thickness. d. 5acking:.026" thick, Backer type (high pressure). 2.5urfare finish: a. Provide plastic laminate equal to Wilson Art solid colors, velvet finish as selected by the Arahiteat from standard patterns. b. Provide melamine meterial for all unexposed surfaces color white. C. Synthetic composite 5oard5: 1. In addition to AWI requirements, NO WAFER OR CHIP 80ARnS will be allowed in any architectural woodwork Items. V. cabinet Hardware: .1. Shelf Standards: KV #255 Nickel Fin15h 2. Shelf 5upport5: KV #256 Nickel Finish SECTION 06400 PA6E 5 ARCHITECTURAL A00VAORK SECTION 06400 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. I Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in Installation areas prior to installing. B. Backprime woodwork on all surfaces which will be concealed with one coat of wood primer. Schedule delivery to allow time for application and drying of backprime coat before installation of woodwork. 5.02 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Install, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using. concealed shims. B. Cut to .fit unless specified to be shop -cut to exact size. where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. C. P15tribute defects allowed in the quality grade specified to the best overall advantage, when Installing Job assembled woodwork items. 5.05 INSTALLATION OF CA5EINORK — A. Install casework in a manner consistent with the specified ouality Grade to be plumb level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as using concealed shims. B. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, conceal end fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finlshed work. 5.04 INSTALLATION OF PLASTIC LAMINATE TRIM ' A. install in proper sequence in accordance with Shop Drawings. Attach to supports with concealed mechanical fasteners or approved adhesive. Dp not nail or fasten through exposed face. B. Plastic .laminates shall be bonded to a core material, such as plywood, using adhesives and techniques as recommended by reliable adhesive manufacturers, and National Association of Plastic Fabricators Specification 061-1006. Provide backing sheet. SECTION 06400 PA6E 4 ARCHITECTURAL WOOP7 NORK SECTION 06400 c. where plastic laminate finished elements are integral part of wood casework, provide same ouality Grade specified for other portions of casework. V. Fabricate with plastic laminate matching other exposed surfaces, unless otherwise shown st all exposed edges. E. cut openings in plastic laminate finished tops for equipment which is to be Installed under other sections of these specifications. Verify sizes of ope6ing with actual size of equipment to be used, prior to making openings. Form inside corners to ,a radius of not less than 1 /6". After sawing, rout and file cutouts to ensure smooth, crack -free edges. Seal exposed edges after cutting with a waterproofing material recommended by the plastic laminate manufacturer. 5.05 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Repair damaged or defective work as directed by architect. B. clean exposed interior and exterior surfaces. c. clean shop finished woodwork, touch-up finish as required and remove and refinish damaged or soiled areas of finish. 9nd of Section SECTION 06400 PAGE 5 WATER, REPEL.L6NT COATINP r i SECTION Owl 1 015 r" PART 1 6ENERA - 1.O 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, Including 6eneraiconditions,5upplementary I~ General conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Pivision 1), apply to the work specified in this section. F 7 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The extent of all water repellent coatings shall be to all exposed to the exterior decorative concrete masonry units. B. The following type of water repellent Is included under this section: 1.5pray applied masonry water repellent for decorative concrete masonry units. c. Roofing, sealants, vapor barriers, base and metal fiashings and other moisture protection items are 5pecifled under other headings: 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry 1.04 REGULATORY REOUiREMENTS A. conform to applicable codes for application of product and over spray protection. B. Protect all in place work from over spray. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Architect for approval 5 copies of specifications for all types of water repeilants before any materials are ordered for the same; installation instructions are to be included In this submittal. B. Each type of water repellant shall be guaranteed against leakage of water, excessive deterioration or otherwise failing to perform as required within the guarantee period, due to failure of materials or workmanship. The period of guarantee is for a term of 5 years after acceptance of the building by the Owner and Architect. PART 2 PROPUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Masonry water repellant ghat be equal to PRIME -A -FELL 200, that Is manufactured 7 SECTION 007 117 5 PA6E 1 ` 11 YiATER REPELLENT COATING SECTION O ,71 '15 by Chemprobe Corporation. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION — A. Proceed with water repellant coating only after substrate construction and penetration work has been completed. Installer shall not commence his operations until all substrate and other conditions are acceptable to him for a satisfactory installation. 5.02 PROTECTION A. Protect all items and surfaces not to receive this repellant coating. 5.05 INSTALLATION A. Proceed with work under this heading only when weather conditions comply with manufacturers recommendations. S. All water repellant products shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturers — printed instructions. All surfaces shall be dry and compatible in every other way to provide a Complete and satisfactory water repellant installation: C. All exterior surfaces of masonry shall be given one brush or spray coat of Clearwater repellent coating applied in accordance with manufacturers specific written directions. Care shall be taken to not over spray or over -run other adjacent materials. special — care should be taken to protect the exposed steel and metal wall panels. 5.05 GLEAN UP A. As recommended by the manufacturer for applied surfaces. End of Section SECTION O 67 1 07 5 FACM 2 MASHING ANP SHEET METAL SECTION 00600 PART 1 6ENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, beneral Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary beneral Conditions and Division 1 - 6eneral Requirements apply to the work of this Section. , 1.02 Y409K INCLUDED A. coping, parapet and cap fleshings . B. 5cuppers . C. Roof fleshings. 17. counterf lashings over bituminous base fleshings. E. counterf lashings at roof mounted mechanical equipment and vent stacks. 1.05 INORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Furnish flashing receivers and accessories to section 04200 - Unit Masonry for installation of roof fleshings. 1.04 RELATED ^ORK A. Section 06100 Rough carpentry: kood blocking, nailers, and grounds. B. Section 0'161 1 - Sheet Metal Roofing and Mall Panels. C. Section 0'7 q00: Joint Sealers. D. section 15 - Piping and Accessories: Fleshing sleeves and collars for mechanical Items protruding through roofing membrane . 1.05 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM 552 - Solder Metal B. ASTM AS25 - Steel Sheet, Zinc coated, (baivanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. SECTION 001600 PAOF. 1 N.A.SHINCG A.NP SHEET METAL. SECTION 07 600 C. A5TM D226 - Asphalt -Saturated Organic Pelt Used in Roofing and ViaterproofIng. D. F5 0-F-506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid. E. F5 00-5-51 1 Solder, Tin Alloy. F. F5 55-C-15 5 - Cement, Bituminous, Plastic. 6. NAAMM - Metal Finishes Handbook. — H. 5MACNA - Architectural sheet Metal Manual. 1.06 SYSTEM DE5eoRIPTION A. Vvork of this'section is to physically protect metal roofing and wall panels, wall and roof fleshings from damage that would permit water leakage to the building interior. 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing In sheet metal flashing work with B years minimum experience. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section _ B. Describe material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details fastening methods, and installation details C. Submit manufacturer's Installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 BOO. 1.0a 5TORACGE AND HANDLING A. store products under provisions of Section 01600 B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration,, staining, or damage. 1.1 O MIARRANTY _ A. Furnish written warranty for materials and workmanship for two year period from SECTION 07 600 PAGE 2 i FLASHING ANP SHEET METAL SECTION 0 -1 600 date of substantial completion. B. Warranty shall be signed by installer and Gontraator. G. Furnish written : 10-year manufacturer's warranty from the date of substantial completion. PART 2 PROnUGTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. MBGI B. Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel for all fleshings associated with the roofing system: ASTM A525, 690, 26 gage core steel. Equal to MBGI "6aivalume." B. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525, 6a0; 26 gage core steel. G. Pre -Painted 6alvaiume Steel for all fleshings associated with the wail system: A5TM A525, 6a0, 26 gage core.steel, shop pre -coated with coating of selected color by the Architect. Equal to MBGI "Signature 200 Series." 1. Type: Flashings as indicated. 2. Material: 26 Gal, 6a0 galvanized steel 5. Finish: Signature 200 Coatings, Coior as selected by the Architect. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Fastener:As recommended by the manufacturer with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners. Finish at exposed fasteners same as flashing metal. B. Underiayment: ASTM a266; No. 50 a5phalt saturated roofing felt. as recommended by the manufacturer. G. Metal Primer: As recommended by the manufacturer. V. Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous. 15 mil coating, sulfur free F5-TT=G-404 or SSPG paint 12. SECTION 0 67 600 PA6E 5 FLASHING ANP SHUT METAL SECTION 007600 S. Sealant: Type as specified In Section 0 1900. F. Bedding Compound: Polyisobutylene mastic as recommended. G. Plastic Cement: FS S6-C-155, Type I -asphaltic base cement. H. Solder: F5 00-5-511; ANSI/A5TM 552; 5Q/50 type. I. Flux: FS 0-F-506. -- 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 5. Fabricate c-leats and starter strips of 1 6 gage type sheet metals size as required, Interlockable with sheet. C. Form pieces In longest practical lengths. — 17. Hem exposed edges on underside 'A inch; miter and seam corners. S. Form material with standing seam. F. solder and seal metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints _ clean. 6. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 16 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. H. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward _1 /4 Inch and hemmed to form drip. I. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. J. Provide for thermal expansion of running sheet metal work, by overlaps of expansion Joints in fabricated work. W-ere required for.water-tight construction, provide hooked _ flanges filled with Polyisobutylene mastic for 1 " embedment of flanges. Space joints at Intervals of not more than 5o feet. Conceal expansion provisions where possible. 2.05 FINISH A. Shop prepare and prime exposed ferrous metal surfaces. SECTION Ol600 PAGE 4 N 0 r i F4ASHING ANP SHEET METAL SECTION '0?600 B. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minim-un dry film thickness of 15. PART 5 " EXECUTION 5.01 INSPECTION A. Verify roof openings, cures, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, rant strips and regrets In place, and nailing strips located. B. verify membrane termination and base fleshings are in place, sealed and secure. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions 5.02 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating; work B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting- Installation. G. secure fleshings In place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only In locations approved py Architect/Engineer. P. seam and seal all joints. E. Apply plastic cement compound between metal fleshings and felt fleshings . F. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to prof lies. 6. Solder metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. H. Seal metal joints watertight. 5.05 INSTALLATION A. Conform to drawing details included in AISI, CPA, NAAMM, SMACNA and NRCA manual 8. All sheet metal shall be fabricated and installed to provide water and weathertight construction, set piumb, square an true in every respect. Sheet metal shall be, set with lines and align sharp and true; plain surfaces shall be free of waves and buckles. Joints and seams in plain surfaces ehall be avoided where possible. F SECTION 0Z600 PAGE *� F FLASHIN6 AND SHEET METAL SECTION 0 27 600 G. NO STRETCH FORMING YVIJ..L PE REQUIRED. Grime or cut to Create segmenting of coping fleshings as required to acheive desired radius apperance. 5.04 , D-JUSTIN6 AND CLEANING A. Adjust all surfaces for complete and proper fit. -- 5. Remove excess plastic cement, sealant materials and smears from adjacent surfaces and working surfaces as work progresses., C. On completion of work, recheck for spillage or droppings of plastic cement or asphalt products. Remove with a cleaning agent approved by the Architect. a. Remove ail debris resulting from these operations from the site. 5.05 PROTECTION A. After installation, the Contractor shall adequately protect the exposed surfaces of the fiashings and edge guards from damage by subsequent trades or from contaminants -- End of Section SECTION 0 "i 600 PACE 6 r U SHEET METAL ROCSPING AND N1,4LL PANELS SECTION O'? 6 1 1 PART 1 '6ENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, suppiementarW General Conditions, Special conditions and 6enerai Requirements (Division 1). applW to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precoated and natural galvanized steel roofing, wail panels and associated fleshings. 1.05 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking and plWwood roof deck substrate for metal roofing and wall profiles. B. 5ection Oi 600 Sheet Metal Fleshing and Trim. G. 5ection 017 Q00 - .Joint Sealers. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM AS 1 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (6alvanized) bU the Hot Dip Process for Roofing and Siding. S. ASTM A446 - Steel sheet, Zinc coated (6avvanite4) OW the Hot Dip Process, Structural (physical) OualitIj. C. ASTM D21 'T 6 - Asphalt Impregnated Glass Mat, for Roofing and waterproofing. D. F5 55-C. 155 -Cement, Bituminous, Plastic E. NAAMM - Metal Finish Handbook. F. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate on shop drawings, material profile, Jointing pattern, Jointing details, I SECTION 01 & 1 1 PAGE 1 F SHEET METAL RQOFING ANP MALL PANELS SECTION OZ61 1 fastening methods, and installation detain. 5. Product Pate — 1; Provide manufacturer's standard printed product Information describing materiels. and finishes. -- G. Samples 1. submit four samples 6 x 6 inch In size of metal roofing and wall panels mounted on plywood backing or sheathing and illustrating typical exterior corner. Junction to vertical dissimilar surface, material and finish. 1.06 SYSTEM OE5CRIPTION A. Completed roofing systems shall comply with UL90. — 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: company specializing in sheet metal roof Installation5.with 5 years documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. $tack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. _ 5. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration or staining. _ 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate with the work of Section 04200 for installation of required blocking and receivers. 1.10 WARRANTY _ A. Provide installers two year weathertightnes5 guarantee. 5. Provide 10 year manufacturer's paint finish guarantee against deterioration due to fading, chalking and peeling. SECTION 016 1 1 PACPS 2 SHEET METAL ROOFING ANV YNiALL PANELS SECTION 00761 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFAGTURER.S A. MBCI B. 5ub5titutions: In accordance with section 01600. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal 1. Pre -Coated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A446, Grade A. 690 zinc, coating; 26 gage core steel, shop pre -coated with polyvinyiidene fluoride coating of selected color. Equal to MSGI "signature 200 Series". 2. Galvanized Stelel: ASTM A446, Grade A, 6aO zinc coating; 26 gage core steel. Equal to MSGI "Oalvalume". B. Acces5orla5 1. Fasteners: Galvanized steel or stainless steel with neoprene washers. Finish exposed fasteners same as flashing metal 2. Underiayment: ASTM 021 16, No. SO asphalt saturated roofing felt. 5. slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper, only as required by the manufacturer. 4. Seaiant: a5 specified in Section 01 Q00 5. Bedding Compound: as recommended by manufacturer 6. Plastic Cement: F5 55-C-15 S, Type I -Asphaltic, base cement. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General 1. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from dl5tortion or defects. 2. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. S. Hem exposed edges on underside 1 /2 inch; miter and seam corners. SECTION 016 1 1 PAGE 5 SHEET METAL ROOFING AN17 WALL PANELS SECTION 007 6 1 1 4. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 16 inch long leg; seam for rigldity, seal with sealant. 5. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1 /4 inch and hemmed to form drip. 6. Fabricate fiashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges. 5. Roofing and Wall Panel: 521nth wide panel, 7/8 inch thickness - COVAL to'c" Panel ^ profile manufactured by M5G, G. Panel Clips: standard with roofing manufacturer. PART 5 EXECUTION 5,01 EXAMiNATION A. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to eaves. B. verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. verify joints in wood deck are solidly supported and fastened. C. Verify cant strips and regrets are in place, and nailing strips located. D. verify roofing membrane termination and base flashings are in place sealed, and secure. E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions 5.02 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. 5. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. C. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfigurement 5.05 INSTALLATION A. Appiy underlayment in single layer laid perpendicular to slope weather lap edges 2 inches and nail in place. Minimize nail quantity. SECTION 0-761 1 PAGE 4 i r SHEET METAL ROOFING AND YV,4LL PANELS 5EGTiON O "i 61 1 5. Apply plip sheet in one layer, lald loose, only If required by the manufacturer. I^ G. Use bedding compound for ,joints between metal and bitumen or metal and felts. W. install roofing In direction as Indicated on, drawings and In accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. E. secure flashin s in lane using concealed ,fastenero. Use exposed fasteners only in g p g p � locations approved by the manufacturer. F. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. 6. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and Straight In planes, and lines accurate to profiles. .r 1 " End of Seatlon II roll r r SECTION 007 1 1 PAGE 5 r' r F CAULKING AN17 SAALANTS SECTION 0 *7 a 00 PART 1 GENERAL , 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, Including General Conditions, supplementary General conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DE5CRIPTION OF ridkl< A. Provide caulking in con junction with interior painting operations and as otherwise indicated on Drawings for interior caulking. 5. Provide sealant where indicated on the Drawings in con junction with sound seals, and as otherwise noted. C. Perform all work required to complete the joint preparation, joint packing or filler, priming, caulking and sealing indicated by the Drawings and specified herein. Furnish all supplementary items necessary. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Section 04200 Unit Masonry 5. Section O-t 60o Flashing and Sheet Metal C. Section 016 1 1 Sheet Metal Roofing and wall Panels D. Section 0di 900 Painting 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers Is acceptable provided it complies with the requirements of this section. 1. Pecora Chemical Corporation 2. 5onneborn 5uildin# Products, Inc. 5. Products Research and chemical Corporation 4. Tremco Manufacturing Company 5: A. R. Grace and Company 6. General Electric company 'I. Mamgco International, inc. SECTION 087 1100 PASSE 1 GAULKIN(5 ANP $F-ALANT$ SECTION 01900 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE _ A. Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by the manufacturer. store In a manner to protect materials from the weather. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. submit manufacturer's published data for sealants. show each color available. ^ Color selection will be by the Architect. S. when requested by the Architect, submit samples of cured 5e'alants and a 6" long sample of each type of joint backup If required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sealant: Equal to Vulkem 1 16 polyurethane sealant as manufactured by Mameco international, Inc: of Cleveland, Ohio. B. -Sealant Primer: As recommended by the manufacturer for'each type of surface application. C. Caulking Compound: (::)me part acrylic latex caulk for general purpose interior caulking capable of being painted with latex or oil base paints. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. Examine all surfaces to receive sealant and report all conditions not acceptable. Installation shall be deemed as acceptance of the surface. S. Clean all surfaces and joints thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, water surface, dirt, frost, old caulking material and previously applied paint or primer. r C. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with ,sealant or caulk manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. D. Remove loose mill scale from steel surfaces. Remove dirt, oil, or grease by solvent cleaning and wipe surfaces. All surfaces must be clean and.dry. Any protective coating on building materials that will impair sealant.bond shall be removed. E. Report unsatisfactory surfaces to the Architect. SECTION Owl 900 PANGS 2 5.02 APPLICATION OF SEALANTS A. Follow sealant manufacturer's Instructions regarding preparation, priming, . application life and application procedure. 5. Apply masking tape where required in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge. Remove tape immediateiy after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed. C. Apply sealant under pressure with gun having nozzle of proper size, or other appropriate means. Provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints. P. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. use clean water -wet tool or tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant. 5.05 .JOINT SIZES A. Sealant and Caulking: Vepth equal to 5 times joint width. 5.04 APPLICATION OF CAULKING A. Caulking: Caulk ,Joints before final cost of paint is applied to adjacent surface. Apply caulking with a pressure gun having a nozzle of proper size to fit joint. Completely fill joint and flrmiy tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bed, and assure good adhesion. Caulking shall develop a firm skin before paint is allowed. S.05 CLEANING A. Remove excess caulking or sealant materials and smears from adjacent surfaces as work progresses. •� S. On non -porous surfaces excess uncured sealant shall be removed with a solvent moistened cloth immediately. On porous surfaces excess sealant should be allowed to cure overnight, then removed by lightly wirebrushing or sanding. All adjacent surfaces shall be clean and free from stains. C. Remove all debris resulting from these operations from the site. End of Section r f SECTION 01 q40 PAGE 5 rm— HOLLONi METAL VOORS 4 FRAMES SECTION 06150 PART 1 6ENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENT5 A. The general provisions of the contract, including General conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (VIvl5Ion 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DE50RIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of hollow metal doors and frames is shown on the drawings and schedules; all shall be custom hollow metal work. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry B. Section 06100 - Carpentry Work C. Section 08665 - Aluminum sliding window Unit D. Section O8'700 - Finish Hardware E. Section 06500 - biass and blazing 1.04 OUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hollow metal doors and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work. 5. The Contractor shall not submit any hollow metal manufacturer for the Architect's approval without first verifying that the proposed manufacturer, facilities are adequate to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The manufacturer shall have been in the business for at least five years and he shall have a record for financial responsibility and for doing work of the quality required by the Contract Documents. 1.05 REFERENCE 5TANDf4RD5 A. SDI-100 - Recommended Sp"Iflcations-Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute. r SECTION 05 150 PAS,E 1 A HOLLOW METAL. POOKS 4 FRAMES SECTION 05150 B. underwriters' Laboratories Inc,. (UL), and Factory Mutual (1~M), as applicable to fire rated hollow metal door frames. C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc, Coated (6alvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, General Requirements. D. ASTM A56cI - Steel, Carbon, Hot -Robed Sheet and Strip, Commercial Ouality. E. ASTM AS'1 1 - Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled, Electrolyte Zinc, Coated. — F. ASTM A566 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 1.06 SUBMITTALS. A. shop Drawings _ 1.Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and erection of hollow metal doors and ,frames. Include details of each frame type, conditions at openings, details of construction, locations and installation requirements of finish hardware and relnforcements and details of joints and connections. Show anchorages and necessary items. B. Samples 1.Submit 12" x 12" sample corner section of typlcal frame showing details of construction and finish. 2.Submit samples of all accessorles. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Materiel manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable provided It compiles with the Contract Documents. 1.HOLLOMI METAL Steelcraft Deansteel Republic steel Corporation r Hof-O-Met, Inc. Tex -steel Corporation SECTION 051 50 PAGE 2 HOLLOW METAL POOKS 4 FRAMES SECTION 051 50 2.02 MATERIALS A. doors 1. Exterior and Interior: 16 gage stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A525, G60. B. Frames 1. Interior: 16 gage steel conforming to ASTM A$66. 2. Exterior: 14 gage steel conforming to ASTM A525, G60. C. Protective Coatings 1. Bitum1nous coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion. 2. Primer: Zinc -chromate Alkyd resin primer for baked primer, Fed. Spec. TT-P-645. P. Accessories 1. Jamb Anchors a. Masonry construction: IT, strap type, corrugated and galvanized. b. Stud Construction: ,Z, type, same gage and material ac? frame. 2. Silencers: Resilient Rubber S. Glazing Bars: tZolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style screws. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Frames 1. Form metal frames to size and shapes indicated from cold rolled, pickled, and oiled steel sheets with clean smooth surfaces. Fabricate all frames from 14 gauge steel unless otherwise indicated. All frames fabricated and assemble as compiete welded unit. Grind all welds smooth. SECTION 05150 FA6E 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS k FRAMES SECTION 05150 2. Construct frames strong, rigid, neat and free from defects, true and fully welded unit type construction at joints. Miter joints and continuously arc -weld full depth and width of frames, press smooth and invisible. welds of joints on exposed _ surfaces. S. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap with templates, frames to receive mortised hardware. Provide reinforcing plates for surface applied hardware. Reinforce for hinges with '1 gauge steel; for locks and other hardware cutouts with 12 gauge steel; for surface applied hardware with 12 gauge steel. — 4. Provide 26 gauge galvanized cover boxes in back of all hardware cutouts. Punch frames for rubber or vinyl silencers; three on lock side of single doors and one for each leaf in heads of double door frames. S. Provide jamb anchors for frames set in stud partitions, welded to back of frames, not less than 14 gauge, of design required for type of stud, 4 anchors for openings up to '1'-6" and one additional anchor for each additional so" height or part thereof. Locate anchors immediately above each hinge reinforcing plate and one below the top hinge reinforcing on both sides. r' 6. Provide 14 gauge steel fixed floor clips fastened to bottom of each jamb, member and drill for 5/6" anchor bolts for floor connection. '1. Provide temporary steel spreaders fastened aoross bottom of frames. Label each frame before shipping with metal or plastic tags to show their location, size door swing and,other pertinent information. 6. Rubber door Silencers: Prill stops to receive 5 silencers on single -door frames and 4 silencers on double -door frames. install plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. Furnish and install rubber door silencers. a. Plaster Guards: Provide 22 gauge plaster guards for mortar boxes, welded to the frame, at the back of all finish hardware cutouts inhere mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. S. Moors 1. Fabricate in conformance with SVI-100 and to meet Grade II, Model 4. 2. core construction: For 1-5/4 Inch doors with Poiystyrene core shall have a 4u° factor of 0.24, a "R° factor of 4.1 '1 and a STG rating of 52. The rigid core of polystyrene foam board shall be bonded to face sheets with an adhesive. compressive strength of the core shall be not less than 1500 psf and a shear SECTION 05 1 50 - PACSE 4 strength of not less than 16 psi. The strength of the bond between the polystyrene and the steel face sheets shall exceed the strength of the polystyrene, so that delamination does not occur under any operating condition. 5.'Vertical edges shall be reinforced by a 1 6 gage minimum continuous steel channel OWN extending full height of the door. The top and bottom edge., shall be reinforced With 1 6 gage inverted channels spot welded to the face sheets. r- 4. All doors shall be mortised and reinforced to allow field application of hinges and locks in accordance with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware contractor. Hinge reinforcement - 'T gage, Lock - 12 gage, Closure 14 gage, Lock Support - 20 gage, all surface mounted hardware - 16 gage. 2.64 SHOP PAINTING A. Glean ferrous metal and treat chemically to prepare for maximum paint adhesion. Apply coat of rust -inhibitive metal primer by spraying or dipping. Bake oven -dry prime coat to secure hard, abrasion -resistant finish. Finish surfaces smooth and free from irregularities and rough spots. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow metal units and accessories In accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Leave shipping spreaders on frames until complete wall system surrounding the frame is rigidly secured to frame, floors and ceilings, Set Bottom anchors of frame to floor with power -driven fasteners or expansion bolts (not lead shields). C. At stud gypsum walls, install frames to double stud bucks with bolts and screws, welded. Set frame with jambs plumb, head level and frame in true plane. D. Hang doors in frames as scheduled. Welding of hinges to doors or frames will not be permitted. Follow recommendations of the manufacturer for installation of the hardware. Install hardware in location as provided by door manufacturer. E_ . coat contact surfaces of any dissimilar metals with bituminous, base paint and let dry before installation. F. Install all surface mounted hardware taking care that all attachment devices are r SECTION 061 50 PACGE 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS 4 FKAMAS SECTION 051 50 anchored in their reinforcement materials inside the door frames. G. After installation, adjust all hardware items for correct, easy and efficient operation. H. I install hollow metal frames plumb and square, In correct location indicated on drawings and with a maximum diagonal distortion of 1 / 16 inch. Ensure frames are securely and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction. I. Final Adjustments: 'Check and readjust all operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. J. Aluminum Sliding Nindow unit: verify that the area to receive this unit is constructed to a cased opening profile and that all dissimilar material items have been protected. Fabricator_ to coordinate all aspects of these units with the sliding door supplier to provide for a complete and proper installation. Installers to coordinate ail flashings. 5.02 CLEASING A. Remove all smudge, dirt, oil, grease or adhered materials which might affect painting. Remove all excess materials and debris from site. , End of Section SECTION 06 150 J� r- ALUMINUM SWPI.NG WINPOIN UNIT SECTION 06665 A PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATF-P DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Provisions includingGeneral Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1 E. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Aluminum sliding window, frame and glazing or Insect screening per application. Work to be installed in a hollow metal window frame. B, Anchors, brackets, and attachments. C. Hardware. �* P. Perimeter sealant. E. Dissimilar metal separation and protection. 1.05 WORK INSTALLED BUT FORN16HEh UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 06150 - Hollow Metal Window Frame 1.04 RELATED WORK A. Section 06100 - Carpentry Work: Framed blocking and wood perimeter shims for . the hollow metal frame. B. Section 0? ao0 - .Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. C. Section 05 1 50 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 0. Section 05600 - Glass and Glazing. 1.05 REFERENCES i A. AN51/A5TM A56 - 5tructural Steel. *� B. AN51/A5TM A566 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. C. AN51/A5TM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Guality. I t D. AN51/A5TM 5221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. Section 08665 PAGE 1 y- IE ALUMINUM SLIDING WINPON UNIT SECTION 08665 E. ANSI/ASTM E265 - Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. F. ANSI/ASTM E550 - Structural Performance of Exterior Wlndows, Curtain Walls, and'Doors by uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. G. ASTM B204 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. H. FS TT-P-5 1-Paint, Oil:.lron Oxide, Ready Mixed, Red and Brown. I. FS TT-P-641 - Primer Coating; zinc Dust -Zinc Oxide (for Galvanized Surfaces). J. FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type. 1.06 PERFORMANCE A. system to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling temperature range of 1 '70 F degrees without causing = detrimental effects to system or components. B. Design and size members to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind to a design pressure of 20 Ib/sq ft and a suction of 20 Ib/sq ft as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM EIP50. C. Limit mullion deflection to 1 /200, or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. D. Drain water entering Joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior. E. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 au ft/min/sq ft of assembly surface area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 0.5 inches water gage as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E255. F. System ,to accommodate, without damage to system . or components, or deterioration of perimeter seal: Movement within system; movement between system and perimeter framing components; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of structural support framing. 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section O 1500. B. Include system and component dimensions; components within assembly; framed -- opening requirements and tolerances; anchorage and fasteners; glass and infilis; door hardware requirements; and affected related work. Section 05665 FACvE 2 c. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of 5eatlon 01500. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section O 1500. E. submit. one samples illustrating prefini.shed aluminum surface. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANa HANPLIN& A. deliver and handle system components under provisions of Section O 1600. B. Store and protect system components under provisions of Section O 1600. C. Provide strip-pable coating to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces. 1.Oci WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section O 1 TOO. B. Warranty: cover complete system for failure to meet specified requirements. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Aluminum Sliding Window and Framing 1. Nissen and company, Inc. - Series `& window with Screen. 2. Alenco - Series 525 Sliding glass door with screen 5 Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/A5TM 5221, 6065-T5 alloy. B. Sheet Steel: ANSI/A5TM A446; galvanized in accordance with ASTM B655. G. Steel Sections: AN51/A5TM A56; shapes to suit mullion sections. P. Primer: FS TT-P-51; red, for shop application and field touch-up. E. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: F5 TT-P-641. TT-P-645. F. Fasteners: Stainless steel. section 06665 PAGE 5 ALUMINUM SLIPING YVINVOIN UNIT SECTION 05665 2.Os FABRICATED COMPONENTS A. Frames: opening size as indicated on the Drawings and to be verified with the Hollow Metal supplier. Frame sizes to be approxlmateiy 2- 114 Inch to 5-s/4 inch width ind 5/4 lnch to 1-1 /4 inch In height. _ B. Rolling Panels: corners of rolling panels shall be coped and lapped and fastened with screws to form a weathertight jolnt. Two .ball bearing wheels in the railing .� system shall be lubricated and sealed, and shall be easily adjustable after Installatlon. 2.04 61-ASS ANa GLAZING MATERIALS A. class and blazing Materlal5: 1. Sliding units at the concesslon Area shall be plastic or wire screening - Equal to an insect screening of black vinyl coated 15/ 16 mesh fiberglass screen Cloth complying with F5 L-5-125B and ANSI-5MA-1004, set in an aluminum frame fitted to hollow metal frame opening and held In place by a 8/4" X S/4" hollow metal glazing stop. contractors option to provide In lieu of fiberglass screen an aluminum or steel mesh insect screening complying with the same requirements. 2. Sliding units at the Press Box Areas shall be equal to 6E Plastics LEXAN, 1 /4" LEXAN MR5 with the insect screening on the outside of the unit. r 2.05 HAR>7WARE A. Manufacturer's standard pulls, keepers and locks. B. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous. 2.06 FABRICATION At. Fabricate sliding units allowing for minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation. B. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with, screw and spline. Make joints and . connections flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior. V. Prepare components to recelve anchor devicee. Fabricate anchorage items. E. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from view. F. unit to be eurface mounted to a cased opening designed hollow metal frame. r-. Section 05665 PAGE 4 r. r. ALUMINUM SLIDING KNDOYV UNIT SECTION 06665 2.09 FINISHES A. Exterior Extruded Aluminum Surfaces: AA-M 12G22A41 clear anodized. B. Interior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: AA-M 12G22A41 clear anodized. c. Concealed Steel items: Galvanized In accordance with ANSI/ASTM A566 to 2.0 oz/sq ft. P. Apply two coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART S. EXECUTION 5.01 INSPECTION A. Verify frame openings are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 5.02 INSTALLATION A. Install sliding window unit; glazing and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. S. use anchorage devices to securely -attach frame assembly to structure. C. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional, tolerances, aligning with. adjacent work. 0. Install fleshings as required. E. Pack fibrous insulation In shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. F. Install hardware using templates, provided. G. install glazing or insect screening In accordance with Section 05500, Section 06600, and this Section. H. Install perimeter type sealant, backing materials, and installation requirements in accordance with Section 0'79oo: I. Adjust operating hardware.. Section 06665 PAGE 5 r ALUMINUM 5LIVING KNPOV4 UNIT SECTION 06665 5.05 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plane: 0.05 Inches per foot maximum or 0.25 inches per so feet' whichever is less. B. Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.015 inches.. 5.04 GLEANiNG A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. B. Wa5h down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water,. applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. 0. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or -other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. D. Wash .and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to Owner's acceptance of the Work in each I area. comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Pia5tic Glazing shall be cleaned with manufacturer's approved cleaning products. i End of Section Section 05665 PAGE 6 FINISH HARVINARIS SECTION 06 '100 PART 1 GENERAL ..1.01 RELATED VOrUMF_NT6 A. The general provisions of the Contract, including d,eneral Oondltl6ns. Supplementary General Conditions, Spec-Ini, Conditions and General nequirementr; (Division 1), apply to the work spealfled In this section. 1.02 DE5GRIpTIdN OF riORK A. The extent of finish hardware is scheduled at the end of this ecation, The required types of finish hardware include (but are not necessarily limited to) the following; 1.5utts and hinges, lock and latch sets, alosers, trim units, kick plate5, silencers, and exit devic,05. B. Certain manufactured Items which have hardware furnished as an Integral part of their assembly are not required under this heading. G. Note that hardware for this project must be levee style to meet with compliance with the Americans with Disabilities act of 1-bl9o(AVA). 11.05 RELATED 104ORK A. Section 06 150 Hollow Metal floors and Frames. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A 1 15.1 - Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Door Locks for 1 -5/4 Inch Doors. B. ANSI Al 15.2 -Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or C.,ylindrical Locks for 1-5/4 inch Poore. G. AN51 A 1 10.4 -Door and Frame Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts. V. ANSI A 1 15.5 - Frame Preparation for 161 4 14 0 Series Deadlock strikes. E. ANSI A 1 1 S.ci - Door and Frame Preparation for oloser, Offset Hung, Single Acting. F. ANSI A 156.1 - Butts and Hinges. & ANSI A 156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim H. ANSI A 15 6.5 - Exit Devices. SECTION 08 m7 00 PACM - 1 FINISH HAIRM ARE SECTION 058700 I. ANSI A 1 56.4 - Door controls (Closers). J. ANSI A 1 56.6 - Arehitecturai Voor Trim. K. ANSI A 1 56.1 - Template Hinges. 1.05 SUBMiTTAL5 A. As soon as practicable and not later than 20 days after award of General contract, the contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval, six copies of the finish hardware schedule complete with all details and a sample of each individual Item as may be requested. The General contractor shall not award contract for finish hardware until samples and schedules have been approved by the Architect. B. Finish Hardware Schedule shall be a complete detailed list of hardware required to meet t equirements of the drawings and specifications. C. Provide Architect with manufacturer's parts list and maintenance Instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary Wrenches and tools required for .proper maintenance of hardware. D. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The furnishing of finish hardware shall be sub -contracted only to recognized and experienced supplier and who has in his employment an experienced hardware consultant who is available at ail reasonable times during the course of the work, for project hardware consultation to the Owner, Architect and contractor. 1.01 UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES REGUIREMENT5 A. All hardware for openings requiring a UL label shall be furnished and installed in strict accordance with the requirements of Underwriter's Laboratories. 1.06 TEMPLATES A. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames, and other work to be factory -prepared for the installation of hardware. check the shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper Installation of hardware. 1.04 COORDINATION SECTION 05'700 PAGE 2 FINISH HARa NARLE SECTION 087100 A.. Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and ihciude basic installation i instructions In the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use of i L doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper Installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information in the contract documents. Deliver 71 individually packaged hardware Items at the times and to the locations (shop or field) for installation, as directed by the Contractor. 1.10 65WR.ITY A. Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet Installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware iosses, both before and after installation. 1.1 1 QUANTITIES A. Contractor shall verify the number of doors and other parts requiring hardware listed under an item and make his own quantities in making his quotation, as he will be required to furnish hardware in accordance with the actual requirements of the drawings. in case of any omission or error in the hardware as scheduled, furnish hardware identical to that required for similar openings, as approved by the Architect. 1.1 2 HARDVNARE SCHEDULE A. The Hardware Schedule is not complete with respect to the thickness of doors, hand and backset of hardware items, method of fastening and other detail requirements. Thoroughly check the drawings and door schedules and provide ail required hardware for all openings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Material manufactured by any of the foilowing manufacturers is acceptable, provided it complies with the Contract Documents. 1. LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS Sargent 6000 Series r SECTION 08'700 PAGE S . fi V I. FINISH HARP)NARM 5r;GTION 056700 McKinney Stanely _. 8. GL05E1Q5 Sargent 1 2SO Series �. 4. )NALL STOPS Rockwood 5. PULLS, PLATES. STOPS, BOLTS AND MISCELLANEOUS ITOMS, Triangle Brass, Gheckmark, Trimco, Ives 2.02 HARVYiARE A. Provide items as listed in pchedule at end of this section, complete to function as intended. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and reaommenddtion5. Hiherever cutting and fitting Jr., roquired to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, Install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish applicatioh. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. ao not in5tall surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. B. Adjust and check each operating items of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommendedby manufacturer (graphite -type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as Intended for the application made. G. Viherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work.during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Glean and re -lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. SECTiON 050700 FALSE 4 FINISH HARDY4ARE SECTION 06100 D. If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of '70 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from .the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. E. The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall comply with this paragraph. For hinged doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at the door opener or s0 inches from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. 1.Exterior hinged doors shall not exceed 5.5 lbs. Slight increases in opening force shall be allowed where 8.5 The is *Insufficient to compensate for air pressure differentials. 2.Interior hinged doors shall not require a force exceeding !a Ibs. s.Fire doors shall be adjusted to meet the minimum opening force permitted by governing fire safety Standards. F. Door closers shall be mounted parallel arm. 6. Unless directed otherwise, all hardware shall be mounted at heights as recommended by the hardware industry. The hardware schedule submitted to the Architect shall show proposed mounting heights or locations of each hardware item. 5.02 GENERAL REOUIREMENT5 A. Provide all required hardware although not specifically mentioned; trim such openings with hardware of equal quality and design to that specified for similar openings. No claims for extras will be allowed for any service: or materials which, in the Architect's opinion, should have been foreseen by the contractor and Included in his Proposal. B. Where the exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to the finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having as nearly as practicable the same operation and quality as the types $pecifled. G. Hardware supplier shall make an inspection of each items, and after completion, notify the Contractor, in writing, with a copy to the Arch(tect, of any hardware that has been Improperly installed, it being understood that the Contractor is entirely respons*Ible for satlsfaciory performance of the completed work. 8.05 FASTENIN65 A. Furnish hardware complete with all necessary screws, through -bolts and other SECTION 05 07 00 PACE 5 FINISH Hr4ROAAKE SECTION 06'100 fastenings of suitable type and size to assure a permanent 4oncealed attachment and of finish to harmonize with the hardware. S. Provide concealed fastenings wherever possible. Where exposed, use countersunk Phillips oval -head type screws, (flat head for hinges) and match finish of hardware being attached. Do not attach hardware to metal frames with self -tapping or sheet metal screws. 5.04 INSTALLATION OF WEATHERSTRIPPING A. All weatherstripping shall be installed by experienced mechanlcs in accordance with methods recommended by manufacturer. 1�. All weatherstripping shall be continuous and not pleced In any run. Fasten all materials under this heading with screws or other fasteners to match adjacent background finish. C. Adjust weatherstripping so that installation will be permanently weathertlght, permitting no infiltration of air or dust when doors are in a closed position Leave all weatherstripping in perfect working order upon completion. Set threshold units level and accurately aligned with the frames and doors, and at the proper elevations for door operation. shim, if necessary, for full 4ontinuous support of threshold at each edge and intermediate legs, if any. Use non -corrosive shims of metal or plastic, set in adhesive or otherwise anchored against dislocation from impact forces of traffic upon the threshold. D. Notch thresholds and saddles at all jambs to ensure full width opening in one plece. Set In a bed of either butyl rubber sealant or polyisobutyiene mastic sealant to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant. 5.05 -HA KVr4ARE SCHEDULE HW - 1 Doors Marked 1, 5 Each to Have: 5 Butte TA2 i 14 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 NRP U5P McKinney 1 DeadBolt 4611 U526D Sargent 1 Stop .465 U526D (Door #a Only) Rockwood 1 Threshold .1 '10A. Trlmco 1 Door bottom 160620P Pemko 1 Acatherstripping 45062GP Pemko SECTION 06'700 FAS,rz -b !�4 HW -! Doors Marked 2 To Have: 5 Butts TA29 14 4-1 /2 X 4-1✓2 NRP U5P 1 Lockset 615-1 ;.W 1 L U826D 1 closer EN1 250-PS X TB 1 Kickplate 10" X 2" LDW U5260 1 Threshold 1 '70A 1 Door bottom 150620P 1 weatherstripping 45062GP HW-S Doors Marked 5 To Have: 5 Butts TA21 14 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 NRP U5P 1 Latchset 51 15 LW 1 L. 1 Stop 405 5 Silencers 1229A HW-4 Doors Marked 4.6 Each to Have: 5 Butts TA2-f 14 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 NRP U5P 1 Exit 2 504 K-CGTB 1 closure EN 1 250-PS 1 Kickplate 10" X 2" LDW U5260 1 Threshold 1 'IOA (Door #4) 1 Door bottom 15062cP(Poor #4) 1 Weatherstripping 450620P (Door #4) 1 511encer5 12,2aA(Poor 05) HW-5 Gates Marked 'f, 5, q Each to Have: 1 Hasp M052'f U526D 1. Staple M062'7 U5260 1 Holder 252F U526D SECTION 05100 McKinney Sargent Sargent Rockwood Trimco Pemko Pemko McKinney Sargent Rockwood Trimco McKinney Sargent Sargent Rockwood Trimco Pemko Pemko Trimco 5lerra Pacific Sierra Pacific Hager FA6E FINISH HARP)NARE SECTION 08'700 HW-6 Security Protection Grilles, Marked 10,1 1, 12, 15 Each to Have: 2 Haep M06217 U52617 2 5taple M062'7 US26P 2 Hinges '180-1 12 Gear AIUMInum 2 Holders 60555 and 60455 (except # 10) End Of Section SECTION 05'100 Sierra Pacific Sierra Pacific Roton Sierra Pacific FACE 5 GLASS AND GLAZING SECTION 06800 PART GENERAL 1.01. RELATEP 170CUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 VESCRIPTION OF WQRK A. Glass and glazing for hollow metal frames, aluminum sliding units located at hollow metal frame and door vision panels. 1.05 GUARANTI=E/WARRANTY A. Provide a written ten year warranty, unless noted otherwise, on new materials and Installation. Provide documentation that glass meets these specifications. 1.04 5UBMITTAL5 A. Manufacturer's Pata, Vass: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of glass required. Include test data substantiating that glass complies with specified requirements. Indicate that Glazier has received copy of handling and glazing instructions. B. Manufacturer's Data, Glazing Materials: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, and installation instructions for each type of glazing sealant and compound, gasket. and associated miscellaneous material required. Include manufacturer's published data, or letter of certification, or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is intended generally for the applications shown. Show by transmittal that one copy of each recommendation and instruction has been distributed to the Glazier. PART 2 PROPUCT5 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: The following manufacturers produce glass complying with the requirements of this project: 1. ASG industries, Inc. r 2. CE Glass Division of Combustion Engineering, Inc,. f s. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Libbey Owens Ford ,rr SECTION 08800 PAC7E 1 r GLASS ANP GLAZING SECTION 05500 B. Plastic Glazing - Equal to GE Plastics "I..EXAN". 2.02 GLASS A. Type I: Plastic Glazing - Clear, 1 /4" equal to LEXAN MR5 with standard Five year warranty. B. Type If: Wire Glass - shall be 1 /4 Inch thick clear polished plate wire glass with ,h inch square wire mesh meeting U.B.G. Standard No. 45-4 and ASTM 1056. 2.Os GLAZING MATERIALS A. Provide type and hardness of materials as recommended by the manufacturer for the required application and condition of installation in each case. Provide only compounds which are known (proven) to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted. S. Butyl Rubber sealant: Polymerized butyl rubber compound with Inert fillers and pigments, solvent -based with 759' solids, non -sag, tackfree with 24 hours, paintable, nonstaining. G. Oil -based Face blazing Compound: FS tT-6-410. type and consistency recommended by manufacturer for application shown. D. Molded Neoprene Glazing Gaskets: Molded or extruded neoprene gaskets of the profile and hardness required for watertight construction; comply with ASTM 0 2000, Type and Glass S.G.. E. setting Blocks: Neoprene, '70-90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. F. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. G. Gleaners, Primers and sealers: manufacturer. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION Type recommended by sealant or gasket A. Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating doors) without failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of. glazing materials and other defects in the work. SECTION 05800 PACE 2 evLASS ,AND GLA�ZING SECTION O5500 S. Protect glass from edge damage at all times during handling, installation and operation of the building. Co., Glazing channels are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. The Glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and necessary dimensions established. V. The Glazier must examine the framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing removable stop design, and the conditions under which the glazing is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. r7o not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Glazier. E. Mather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of liquid sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation. P. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representatives direct otherwise. G. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Plat Glass Marketing Association, except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by manufacturer of the glass and glazing materials: H. Clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. i. Apply primer or sealer to Joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer. J. inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate any which have observable edge damage or face imperfections. K. Install setting block or proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. set blocks in thin course of the head=bead compound, if any. L. Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 5o united inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing. Provide 1 /6" minimum bit of spacers of glass and use thickness equal to sealant Width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightiy less than final compound thickness of tape. SECTION 05500 PAGE 3 r l GLASS AND CSYLAZING SECTION 06600 M. unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. In5pact each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction az other pieces. N. Prevent sealant exudation from channel by leaving void at heel, or where shown, by installing compressible filler rod at Jambs and head. O. Do not leave void (or install filler rod) at sill. P. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to insure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel Surfaces. 0. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass-. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. it. Glean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. S. rlhere wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of the channel to pressurize the sealant or gasket on the opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when subjected to dynamic movement. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesives, including embedment of gasket tail in cured heel bead. T. Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in the glazing system. V. cure glazing sealants and Compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. V. Remove and replace glass which Is brokers, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged In any other way during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. K Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during# Construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute (by wash -off) to the deterioration of glazing materials and, other surfaces. 5.02 GLEANING A. After installation, mark clear glass with x by using tape or removable paste. B. Immediately remove droppings from finished surfaces. Remove labels after work SECTION 06500 PACSE 4 15 completed. f Co. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to Owner's acceptance of the work In each area. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Plastic Glazing shall be cleaned with manufacturers approved cleaning products. End of Section SECTION 08600 FA6E 5 RESILIENT FLOORING - AL't`'ERNATE #5 r- ', SECTION 001650 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, ,• Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements + (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF YNORK �.. Resilient flooring, related materials and accessories, for Alternate 3, generally consist'of the following: 1.vinyl Composition Tile r 2.Resilient Cove Type Base B. Refer to drawings and schedules for extent of resilient materials. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Resilient Materials: For information only submit 2 4opies p of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. Indicate by transmittal that a copy of each installation instruction has distributed to the installer- B. Maintenance Instructions: Resilient Materiels: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's written instructions for recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient material. C. Additional Material: Provide one full carton of resilient the to be stored on the ,.-. site for future use by the Owner. a, 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Installer must thoroughly examine the substrate and the conditions under which resilient flooring is to be performed. Notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Surfaces shall be smooth, level and at required finished elevations and without more than 1 %8" in 10'-0" variation. Cracks, holes, seams or low spots shall be filled with approved patch or filler material i SECTION 0 q& 5 0 FACPE 1 RESILIENT FLOORING - ALTERNATE #5. SECTION Oq 6 50 PART 2 PROPUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vjnyl Composition. Tile: Equal to 12" x 12" x 1 /6" thick as manufactured by Armstrong or Tarkett. 5. Resilient ease: Equal to Rubber )Nall 5a5e as manufactured by Roppe. 1 /8 Inch thick, 4 Inches high, cove type. Co. Reducer Strips: Equal to model #q 10 snap -down molding manufactured by Mercer Plastics company. Inc. Provide metal track recommended by manufacturer. V. - Colors as selected by the Architect. E. Adhesives: Niaterproof, stabilized type as recommended by the manufacturer. Emulsions and other non -waterproof type adhesives are not acceptable. F. concrete slab Primer: Non -staining as recommended by the manufacturer. PART B EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Prior to laying flooring or other resilient materials, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect subfloor, start of flooring, installation will indicate acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. Remove existing finish on concrete floor as required for a permanent and 5ati5factory installation. B. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommeh4ed by manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. C. continuously heat areas to receive flooring to `l o degrees F. for at least 46 hours prior to installation, when project conditions are 5uoh that heating is required to raise the temperature to.'70 degrees F. Maintain '70 degrees F. temperature continuously during and after installation as recommended by manufacturer, but for not less than 46 hours. V. Install flooring and other resilient items after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by manufacturer. SECTION 0 el 6 5 0 PAGE 2 RESILIENT FLOORING.- ALTERNATE #5 SECTION 0a650 r E. Place resilient materials with adhesive cement In strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces; thresholds, nosings and edgings. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight, even and straight. Extend into toe spaces, door reveals. and into closets and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non -permanent marking device. 6. install flooring around covers for floor type telephone and electrical outlets and other such items es occur within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed around covers. Tightly I cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers. r- H. Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids. raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhe5lve spreader marks or other surface imperfections. I. Lay the from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of the area be of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than s" at perimeters. Lay the square to wall axis, unless otherwise shown. J. Match tile for color and pattern by using the from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Gut the neatly to and around all appurtenances. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not acceptable. �- K. Lay tile with grain as directed by the Architect. L.. Provide all edge moldings and trim- pieces to provide for a complete and �., satsfactory installation. 5.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed materials from damage with suitable protective covering. 5.05 FINISHING SECTION 09650 PAGE S FtEMLIENT FLOORING-'�kLTERNATS #3 SECTION 0 q 6 50 A,, After completion of project and ,Just prior to, fins] inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. Apply wax and buff, with type of wax, number of coats (no less than two) and buffing procedures, Incompliance with manufacturer's written instructions. End of Sect ion SECTION 0g650 FNNTINS SECTION 0 q q 00 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provi5ion5 of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work Specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of painting work is shown on the drawings and schedules, and as herein epecified. S. The work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout the project, except as otherwise indicated. 1.Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop -priming and Surface treatment specified under other sections of the work. C. . The work includes field painting of all bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under the mechanicai and electrical work, except as otherwise specified. D. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and filler and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. E. Paint all exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where the natural finish of the material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not . designated, the Architect will select these from standard colors available for the materials systems specified. F. The following categories of work are not included as part of the field -applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these specifications: 1.Uniee5 otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under the various sections for structural steel, misceilaneou5 metal, hollow metal work, and similar items. 2.Pre-Finished Items: unless otherwise indicated, do not Include painting when factory -finishing or Installer finishing i5 Specified for such items as (but not limited SECTION 0 q q 00 PAGE 1 ice`' PAINTING SECTION 0 q q 00 to) metal toilet enclosures, prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework, finished, mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets, elevator entrance frames, doors and equipment. 5. Concealed surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings In ooncealed areas and generally inaccesslble areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts .and elevator shafts. 4. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. S. Do not paint over any code -required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenolature plates. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Painting: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical information includin# paint label analysis and application instrudtions for each materials proposed for use. Transmit a copy of each manufacturer,e instructions to the paint Applicator. B. Samples: Painting: Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only. compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the contractor. Provide a listing of the material and application for each coat of each finish sample. 1.0n 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit each sample as requested until acceptable sheen, color and texture is achieved. 1.04 DELIVERY AND 5TORA6E A. . Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: Name or title of material Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. Manufacturer's stock number and date of SECTION 0 q q 00 FA6E 2 r PAINTING fi SECTION O q q OO t - i manufacture. Manufacturer's name. contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning Instructions. color name and number. ., B. store materials and equipment in a single lockable area of project site. Provide adequate means to protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from damage. " C. store clean rags, paint and solvents in closed metal, containers located in designated area. Dispose of soiled rags daily. D. comply with applicable health and fire regulations. 1.05 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION ,r^ ' A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and painted work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. use adequate drop cloths and masking r-- procedures during progress of work. L 1.06 EXTRA PAINT A. Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Owner two (2) gallons of each color of latex and enamel paint used. r- 1.01 GUARANTEE A. This contractor shall guarantee all work performed under this contract for a period of one (1) Wear from date of acceptance. cracking, peeling and scaling of paint shall be judged as defective work. 1.08 .JOB CONDITIONS A. apply paints only When the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding sir temperatures are between 5o degrees and clO degrees F., unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. i k B.. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds e;S%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed lnstructions. l SECTION O Cl 9 DO PAGE S I� PAINTING GECTION 0aa00 C. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer Burin# application and drying periods. 1.04 COLORS ANO FINISHES A. Paint finishes are indicated In the schedules of the contract documents. B. Prior to beginning work, the owner will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted. 1.Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. 2.Fina1 acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job. C. Color Pigments: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit the substrates and service indicated. D. Paint coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify the Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. 1.10 TEXTURE ON GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES A. walls: shall be equal to textone as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum co. Application shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Finish texture_ shall be as selected by Architect or Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Products specified in Schedule of Painting are as manufactured bW Pittsburgh Paint company unless otherwise indicated; equivalent products of Pratt and Lambert, DuPont, Sherwin-Williams, Glidden, Devoe, Gook, TV and Kelly -Moore may be furnished in lieu of those listed, provided that they are of equal type and quality. B. Materials selected for coating systems shall be products of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. SECTION 09 900 PAGE 4 PAINTING.'- '. GECTION O9 900 c, Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be firrst line quality products of a reputable manufacturer. Y j P. Lead Free Paint: All paint Specified for use under this section shall be lead free and mercury free and shall be in full compliance with Federal Hazardous 5pbstance5 .. Act. E. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of ooatinos as regularly manufactured by acaeptable paint materialemanufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer'5 identification as a standard, best -grade product will not be acceptable. F. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. l 2.02 MIXING AND TINTING A. Accomplish job site tinting and mixing only when approved by the Architect. Use tlntin# colors recommended by paint manufacturer for specific type of finish. B. Thin paints only when specifically allowed by manufacturer: do not exceed thinning r„ directions. 2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. compounds: Pre -fill powdered joint compound, taping compound and topping compound, ASTM G4i5-i0. r a B. .Joint Tape: Perforated tape, ASTM 04i5-1i0. PART 5 EXECUTION f 5.01 INSPECTION . t A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and fini5he5 for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of finish work, and which cannot be put into an acceptable conditlon through normal preparatory work. f B. Notify Architect in writing of such unacceptable conditlon5. C. Do not proceed with surface preparations or coating applications until conditlon5 are suitable, SECTION Oct e100 PAGE 5 PAINTING SECTION 09 900 D. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. E. Appiicatioh of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface. 5.02 GENERAL APPLICATION REOUIREMENTS A. The intent of these specifications is to produce highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. 5. Do not apply exterior paint while surface is damp, or during void, rainy, or frosty weather or when temperature is below 50' P. C. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be paintedshall be clean before painting. -- D. clean surfaces free of foreign matter before applying paint or finishes. E. Maintain ambient temperature in building of not less than &O' F. for 24 hours prior to and minimum of 24 hours after interior painting. F. Do not paint masonry surfaces with a moisture aontant 'exceeding 129o, 6. Provide a minimum of 20 foot candles illumination for surfaces to be painted or finished. H. Apply materials with adequate ventilation; maintain ventilation in occupied rooms. 5.05 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PAINTING REOUIREMENTS A. Paint metal surfaces, including pipes, conduit, machinery, equipment panels and boxes where exposed in finished spaces, mechanical rooms or on exterior. Paint equipment Machinery bray, unless otherwise noted, paint pipes and conduits to match adjacent surfaces unless otherwise scheduled. S. Metal surfaces delivered with prime coat shall have abrasions touched up and finish coats applied as specified. C. Touch up abrasions in factory finishes. D. • Paint exposed underside of cast iron sinks and fixture supporting members or structure with 2 coats of enamel. SECTION 0q 900 PAGE 6 E. Paint galvanized ducts exposed to view on interior of building in accordance with schedule. F. Paint air conditioning grilles, registers, ceiling diffusers and speaker grilles in accordance with schedule unless otherwise directed by Arahitect. 6. Paint exposed conduit supports, clamps, hangers and exposed conduit and boxes in accordance with schedule. H. Paint panelboards and other cabinets in accordance with schedule to match adjacent surfaces, when located in finished spaces other than closets or mechanical rooms. I. Paint surfaces inside of ducts, diffusers and other mechanica! openin#s which are exposed to view fiat black. J. Do not paint nameplates on equipment or labels on doors and fraYmes. 5.04 PREPARATION OF 5URFAGE5 A. seal knots, pitch streaks and sappy spots with 2 lb. cut shellac priming. S. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects With putty after fjrst coat. Color to match finish. c. Sand woodwork smooth and clean surface before finishing. D. Backprime interior trim and cabinetry with tinted Wood primer before installation. E. Paste wood filler, applied on open grain wood when "set" shall be wiped across grain of wood, then with grain to secure a clean surface. F. Goat surfaces to be stained with a uniform coat of stain and wipe excess off. CG. Send enamel or varnish finish on wood between coats using a fine sandpaper to produce an even, smooth finish. Thoroughly clean surfaces. H. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt, oil or grease before applying primer. Remove rust or $tale by wire bryshing or sanding clean before painting. clean marred shop coats and touch-up with primer. I. Pretreat galvanized metal surfaces with a crystalline zinc phosphate treatment such as l.ithoform, by American chemical Paint co., Ambler. Pa., or Galvaprep #5, by Neilson chemical co., Detroit, Michigan. r SECTION 0 q 9 00 PAGE 'f . M FAINTING SECTION 0 q 51 04� J. Fill scratches, cracks and abrasions in drywall with a sppckling compound flush with adjoining Surface. When dry, sand smooth And seal before application of priming coat. K. Fill and sand metal door frames as required to provide a smooth surface before finishing. Touch-up factory prime coat before applying first coat. 1.. Touch-up shop Coats on metal surfacee before applying finish. M. Vo not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfacee or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. N. clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. 5.05 .JOINT TREATMENT A. Treat joints, interior angles, fastener depressions and finishing trim on face -layer wallboard. Prof M. tape, fill and finish in etrict accordance with manufacturer'e directions. Sand finish coat and leave surfaces, emooth, uniform, and free of fins, depressions, cracks and other imperfections. Treat joints of all face layers Including above ceilings. 5.06 APPLICATION A. Final coat of paint shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be smooth, free. of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or skipped areas. S. Apply paint,. stain, and varnish with suitable brushes, or rollers, as recommended by manufacturer. Spray appiication will be allowed only upon written approval of the Architect. G. Allow previous coats to thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. D. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. E. slightly vary color of successive coats: F. Sand and dust between each coat as required to remove visual defects. 0. Each coat of paint applied shall be Inspected by Architect before application of succeeding speclfled coats. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats. Provide Architect a report of each coat applied SECTION 0 q q 00 FAGS 5 O',+41NTING SAC-tION 0 e!,qoo when completed for inspection to comply with above. Architect reserves right to make revisions within color range of paint prior to final coat. H, Apply each coat of paint uniformly to minimum wet film (MAN thickness specified In schedule, or as recommended by manufacturer. �,dditlonal coats shall be applied If required to produce full coverage. - 5.01 GLEANING, PATCHIN6 ANP PROTECTION A. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass and other finished surfaces. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable conditions. 5. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and Is, invisible to normal rT viewing. Otherwise, re -coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point. C. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Architect. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newlypainted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. E. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 5.0-5 SCHEVULE OF PAINTING A. The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be those listed below. B. Exterior and Interior Metal: 1.First coat: PP6 6-6 5peedhide enamel undercoat 2.5econd coat: PP6 6-252 Iberles 5peedhide gloss enamel 5.Third coat: PP6 6-252 Series 5peedhide gloss enamel Co. Interior Wood: For paint finish 1.Fir5t coat: PPG 6-6 5pee4hide enamel undercoat 2.5econd Goat: PPG 6-50 Series low sheen enamel S.Third coat: PP6 6-a0 Series low sheen enamel r SECTION O q q 00 FACIE cl PAINTING 65i�,TiON 09 q00 D. Interior Wood at concession Stand ceiling d Wood Exterior soffit: For paint Finish: 1.First coat: PPG 6-b Speedhide.enamel undercoat 2.Secohd coat: PP& A,uapon Polyamide-Epoxy S.Thlyd Coat: PP6 Aq uapon. Polyamide-Epoxy E. Galvanized Metal: 1.First Goat: PPv 6-209 galvanized steel primer 2.Second coat: PPG 6-242 Series Speedhide gloss enamel S.Third Goat: PP6 4, -252 Speedhide gloss enamel F. Interior concrete Masonry Units (at concession Stand Area Only): 1.Fir5t Goat: PP6 6-11 Solvent Pase Polyamide-Epoxy Block Filler, 9?-685/686 or Primer at Smooth Surfaces 2.5econd Goat: PP6 Aq,uapon Polyamide-Epoxy 5.Third Goat: PP6 Aquapon Polyamide-Epoxy End of section SEC,TION 0 q q 00 PAGE 10 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10165 PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Provisions including General conditions, Supplementary General conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floor mounted, overhead braced plastic laminate toilet partitions. 5. Attachment hardware. C. Plastic laminate privacy doors, at single field designs only. 1.05 RELATED SECTIONS . A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry 5. Section 10500 - Toilet and Bath Accessories. 1.04 REFERENCES. A. AN5I A 1 1 -7.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by the Physically Handicapped. 5. AN51 A206.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. G. APA - American Plywood Association. D. A5TM A 1 & "T - Stainless and Heat -Resisting chromium -Nickel Steel I 'late, 5heat, and Strip. E. NEMA LP-5 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. 1.05 SUSMITTAL.5 A. Submit shop drawings indicating partition laWout and dimensions, panel and door sizes, door swings, elevations, anchorage and mounting details, and finishes. B. submit product data for components, hardware, and acce5sorie5. C. Submit manufacturers color and finish samples. SECTION 1016 5 PAar: 1 PLASTICe LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION lip 16 5 D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01500. 1.06 REGULATORY REOUIREMENT5 A. Conform to ANSI A 1 1 "1.1 for provisions for the physically handicapped. 1.01 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2,01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFAGTURER5 A. 5anymetal Products Company B. Ampco Partitions C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIAL-5 A. Wood Particle Board Core: ANSI A205.1 'composed of wood chips set with waterproof resin binder; B-1 s grade, sanded faces. B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LP-5 General Purpose type 0.062 inch thlck. Co. Adhesive: Contact type. D. Headrall: 1 x 1-5/8 inch anodized extruded aluminum; with cast socket type wall brackets. 2.05 ACCE5509M5 A. Pilaster Shoe: A.STM A 16'1, Type 504 stainless steel, 5 inch high with adjustable screw jack. B. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, theft proof type, heavy duty extruded aluminum brackets, c. Through Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel with tamperproof heads. D. Steel Plate Reinforcement: carbon steel, prepared for fasteners, 1 /8 inch thick. 2.04 HARDWARE SECTION 10 16 5 FAaE 2 a PLASTIC, LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 16 5 A. Hinges: Non-ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for dogr close positioning; nylon bearings. 15. Latch and Keeper: Thumb turn door latch, door strike and keeper with rubber bumper. G. Goat Hook: Gast alloy hook with rubber bumper tip. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate partitions by applying single sheet plastic laminate finish to faces and edges of core material using adhesive and pressure, bonding. Seal edges of cut- outs. Bevel corners and edges. B. Reinforce pilaster and panels with steel plate reinforcement sandwiched within particle core at attachment points. Router cut openings as required. G. Thickness of Partition Panels and Doors: One Inch. D. Thickness of Pilasters: 1-1 /4 inch. 2.06 FINISHES A. Plastic Laminate: Equal to Alison art Plastic Laminates, finish color and pattern as selected by the architect. B. Stainless steel Surfaces: No. 4 finish. F c. Exposed Steel Surfaces: Polished chrome plated. f.- D. aluminum: Anodized to color as selected. E. Non-ferrous Surfaces: Polished chrome plated. 2.01 PRIYAGY DOORS AT SINGLE FIELD PROTOTYPE DES1614 f A. all construction to comply with paragraph 2.02 of this specification section. Mom', 4 B. Hinges. Equal to 6AMGO #H-1 - two (2) required for each door. c. Inswing stop and keeper: Equal to 6AMGO #15K=1 one ( 1 ) required for each door. �-. D. Slide Latch: Equal to 6AMGO #L-1 - one ( 1 ) required for each door. I 10K 4 SECTION 10165 PAGE 5 PLASTIC, LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 16 5 PART S. EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work. B. Verify field measurements areas shown on shop drawings. C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, bracing, and plumbing fixtures. V. Beginning of installation means Installer accepts existing conditions. 5.02 ERECTION A. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install partition components secure, plumb and level. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls and floors using appropriate anchor devices. r V. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with through bolts and nuts. Locate headrail joints at pilaster center line. ^ E. Provide % inch space between wall surface and panels or pilasters. F. Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles — integral with pilaster. conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. G. Equip each toilet stall door with top and bottom hinges, and door latch. H. Install door strike keeper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. I. Equip each toilet stall door with one coat hook and bumper. S.OS' ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb or Level: 1 /8 inch. 5. Maximum Misplacement From Intended Position: 1 /8 inch. 5.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align door hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors. clearance space not to exceed 5/ 16 inch. SECTION 10 16 5 PASSE 4 PLASTIC LAM114ATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 16 5 5. Adjust door hinges so that free movement 15 attained and will locate in -Swinging doors in partial open position when uniatched. Return out -swinging doors to closed position. 5.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective coverings. B. Glean surfaces and hardware as recommended by the manufacturer. 5.06 PROTECTION OF FIN1514F-P WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section O 1500. B. Field touch-up of finished surfaces will not be permitted. Replace damaged compon,pnts. End of Section SECTION 10 165 S. PAGE 5 METAL NA}LL LOUVERS SECTION 10210 PART 1. 6ENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, 6eneral Provisions including benerai Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Louvers and frames B. Bird Screening. 1.05 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit masonry B. section o,7 aoo - Caulking and Sealants C. Section Oa a00 -Painting -Field Painting 1.04 REFERENCES A. AMCA 500 - air_ Movement Council association - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. B. ANSI/ASTM 5221 - aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, rods, wire, shapes, and tubes. C. ASTM A52'T - Sheet steel, zinc coated (galvanized) by the hot dip process, lock forming quality. 1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. installed loyiver to permit passage of air velocity of 500 ft/min without blade vibration or noise, with maximum static pressure logs of .06 inches and Is "storm proof." B. Fabricate louver to permit 50 percent free area. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture. of AMCA certified louvers with, three years experience. SECTION 10210 PAGE 1 METAL HALL LOUVERS SECTION 10210. 1.0'1 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Indicate on shop drawings, layout,.elevations, dimensions, and tolerances; head, Jamb, eind sill details; blade configuration; screening, and frames. 2. Provide product delta on preassembled louvers describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, free area, materials and finlshes. 5. Samples - Submit four samples Illustrating finish and color. _ 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with Installation of masonry products. 1.0a FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. PART 2. PRODUCTS — 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A52 7, galvanized to 6,90 zinc coating, primed as required for field painting with color as selected by the Architect, 5. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized or stainless steel type. Co. Size as 16dlcated on the Drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size steel mesh, set in steel frame. , S. Sealant: Type specified in Section 0'1906. C. Primer: Zinc Chromate, alkyd type. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Louver Size: 4 inches deep, face measurements as scheduled on the Drawings. 5. Louver Blade: Sloped at 45 degrees, chevron blade shape, minimum material thickness of 20 gage with intergrai watergtops on blade. SECTION 102 10 PA67S 2 METAL N1A.LL LOUVERS SECTION 10210 c. Louver Frame: Channel shape, welded corner joints, material thickness of 20 gage. D. Screens: Install screen mesh in shaped frame With reinforced corner construction; screw to louver frame. 2.04 FINISHES A. Primed for field painting, with color as selected by the Architect. PART S. EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION A. verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on the shop drawings.. B. Beginning of Installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 5.02 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. install louvers level and plumb. C. Secure louvers In opening framing with concealed fasteners. D. Install insect screening it interior of louver. Hinge screens for access. 5.05 ADJU5TIN6 AND CLEANING A. clean surfaces and all components and adjust all working components of the unit. 5.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED kXORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Field touch-up of finished surfaces as required. End of Section SECTION 102 10 PA►OE 5 SIGNAGPE SECTION 10400 PART 1 GENERA4 1.01 RELATED DOGUMENT5 �.. A. The general provisions of the contract, including General conditions, Supplementary &eneral Gondition5, special conditions and c6eneral Requirements ` (37ivi5ion 1), apply to the work epecified In this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of 5ignage 15 shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Furnish any materials, labor and equipment to coordinate the installation of the signs. c. Unle55 otherwise acceptable to the Architect, furnish all 5i0nage and accessories by one manufacturer for the entire project. D. in addition to the requirements of these specifications, comply with the manufacturer's Instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrate, installation of anchors, and application of signage units. coordinate with work of other trades for application of inserts or other integral equipment items. E. Provide colors and finishes of materials for 5ignage as specified or as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors and patterns. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data showing compllance with these specifications. Submit drawings showing installation details. Provide template for exterior building letters. Provide blueiine rubbing for cast plaque for approval. 15. submit color samples for 5i0nage. PART 2 PRODUGT5 2.01 AGGE551BLE RESTROOM 516NA6E A. Re5troom 5i0nage to be constructed of plastic laminate or acrylic plastics with contrasting background color and white lettering and symbols. The sign shall meet all requirements of the Americans with 0i5abilitiee Act and Texas Accessibility Standards in all conditions. This shall include but i5 not limited to the following: Room Name, universal male or female symbol (in raised condition), accessibility symbol, and braille and other tactile identifiers. r•. i� t SECTION 10400 FA6E 1 r- SIGNAC7S SECTION 10406 PART 3 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. securely mount signage In strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions with concealed, theftproof fasteners. B. Install signage level, plumb, and at the proper height. Cooperate with other trades for Installation of signage to finish surfaces. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by the Architect. End of section SECTION 10400 PAGE 2 owl TOILET ACCESSORIES d I SECTION 10500 a PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS r. A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General conditions, Supplementary ' General conditions, -Special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of each type of toilet accessory is located and indicated on the I*' Drawings. t 1.05 GENERAL A A. use concealers fastenings wherever possible. ,.. B. Verify type of mounting surfaces; provide proper anchors or fasteners to endure permanent mounting. C. Provide locks where specified; provide same keying throughout for gill accessory units. PART 2 PRODUCTS r- 2.01 MATERIALS r- A, Equal to those manufacturer'$ and products as specified on the Drawings. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. install accessories according to manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Install accessories plumb, square, level and true with wall or surfaces. B. Frames of recessed accessories shall neatly trim the opening. Gaps and voids between frames and finished walls will not be allowed. Exposed and concealed fastening shall match finish of fixtures and shall be stainless steel, theftproof type. G. Install concealed anchor plates to wall construction for mounting all accessories. 1 Provide grounds or rough bucks to rigidly secure accessories. D. All controls, dispensers or other operable equipment shall be mounted no higher than a 45 inches above the floor. f f SECTION 10500 PACGE 1 TOILET ACCESSORIES SEC,TION 10600 5.4)2 GLEANING A. Remove all manufacturer's temporary labels or marks of identification. clean and polish to remove all oil, grease and foreign material. Leave accessories in a neat, orderly and clean, condition acceptable to the Architect. End of Section SECTION 10600 PAGE 2 F<:�017 SERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.02 5ECTION INCLUDES Food service equipment - stainless steel triple compartment sink. S. conneatlons to utilities. 1.05 RELATED SECTIONS A. section 06400 - Architectural Millwork: Placement of equipment relative to casework. S. 5ection 15 - Plumbing piping. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for. utility requirements. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 '100. S. Operation Data: Provide operating data for the specified equipment. C. Maintenance Data: Provide periodic maintenance requirement schedules. 1.06 OUALiTY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: company specializing In performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. 1.0"1 5U5MITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01560. -5. Product data on equipment specified indicating configuration, sizes, materials, finishes and location. SECTION 1 1400 PAGE 1 FOOD SERVICE F-OUIPMENT SECTION 1 1400 C. Manufacturer,s Installation Instructions: Indicate any special procedures or perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with Installation of architectural millwork and Section 01054. B. Coordinate the work with location and placement of utilities. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of section 01600. B. Store products clear of floor in a manner to prevent damage. C. Coordinate size of access and route to place of Installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide two year warranty under provisions of Section O 1900. B. Warranty: Include replacement or repair f scheduled equipment, including disconnection of defective unit, and connection of replacement unit. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Advance/Tabco - Product: Triple compartment, stainless steel sink. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Triple Compartment sink: Advance/Taboo Model #6-5-56 2.05 FINISHES A. stainless Steel, squared corner unit, with 5 - 21 " X 56" bowls. PART S. EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION SECTION 1 1400 PASSE 2 d FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT f SECTION 1 1400 A. verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as Indicated on the shop drawings.. S. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 5.02 IN5TALLATION - A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals. G. 5equence installation and erection to ensure correct plumbing utility connections are achieved. D. Use anchorage devices appropriate for equipment and expected usage. E. Provide sealant to achieve clean joint with adjacent building finishes and between any abutting components. 5.05 ADJUSTING AND GLEANING A. Glean surfaces and ail components and adjust all working components of the unit. 8. Adjust equipment and apparatus according to Section, 01 "100 and to ensure proper working order and conditions. C. Remove and replace any defective equipment Items. D. Wash, clean and polish all equipment, hardware and accessories, fixtures and fittings. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINI5HF-D WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 500. End of Section ram. ` SECTION 1 1 400 PAGE 3 r— SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 15.140 PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports. B. Equipment bases and supports. C. Sleeves and seals. D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.02 REFERENCES A. MSS SP55 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. B. MSS SP& 9 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. C. MSS SPBci - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. shop Drawings: Indlcate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers. c. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of components. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. conform to applicable code for support of plumbing piping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Plumbing Piping - DYW: Section 15.140 PAGE 1 8. r I SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 15.140 1 . Conform to MSS SP56, M55 SPbq or M55 SP6cl. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1 /2 to 1-1 /2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. s. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. S. wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 5 Inches: Cast iron hook. 6. wall support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. '1. vertical support: Steel riser clamp. 6. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. cl. copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. B. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1 . conform to M55 SP55 or M55 SP6Q. 2 Hangers for Pipe sizes 1 /2 to 1-1 /2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 5 Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4 Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 6 Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 5 Inches: Gast iron hook. '1 vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 6 Floor Support for cold Pipe: Gast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. cl . Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 10 copper Pipe support: carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.05 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: Section 1 S. 140 PAGE 2 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 15.140 1. Waterproofing: 5 Ib/sq ft sheet lead 2. Soundproofing: 1 Ib/sq ft sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing: 4'7 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 1 6 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.04 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Floors: 15 gage galvanized steel. 5. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel C. Sleeves for Rectangular ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood. V Sealant: Acrylir, PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's Instructions. 5.02 PIPE HANGERS AN17 SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. S. Install hangers to provide minimum 1 /2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. V. Use hangers with 1-1 /2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. CG. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. Section 1 5.1 40 PAGE S SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 15.140 H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. 5.05 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterf lashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting above finished roof surface as shown on drawings. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 86 x 56 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. V. Seal floor drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; calk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb. 5.04 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Calk sleeves. 0. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and calk air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. 5.05 SCHEDULES Section 1 5.1 40 PAGE 4 r SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS i SECTION 15.140 HANGER ROD PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING DIAMETER Inches Feet Inches �., 1 /2 to 1-1 /4 6.5 8/8 1-1 /2 to 2 10 5/5 r, 2-1/2to5 10 1/2 4 to 6 10 5/8 r� 1 PVC, (All Sizes) 6 5/5 r, G.I. Bell and i Spigot(or No -Hub) 5 As required and at .joints END OF SECTION E r I f' r Section 15. 140 PAGE 5 PIPING INSULATION SECTION 15.260 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. .Jackets and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 1 CIS - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement. B. ASTM C555 - Steady -State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation. C. ASTM C44 9 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic -setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing cement. V. ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. E. ASTM E54 - Surface Burning characteristics of Building Materials. F. ASTM EQ6 - YNater Vapor Transmission of Materials. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E64. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. Section 15.260 1 PAGE 1 PIPING INSULATION SECTION 1 5.2 60 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic. C. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. , 1.01 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS FIBER A. Insulation: ASTM C541; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K'('ksi') value: ASTM C555, 0.24 at i5 degrees F. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -20 degrees F. S. Maximum Service Temperature: 650 degrees F. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket 1. White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM EQ6; 0.02 perm inches. S. Secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. C. Tie Wire: 16 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive 1. Compatible with insulation. E. Insulating Cement/Mastic 1. ASTM C 1 Q5; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. F. Fibrous Glass Fabric 1. Cloth: Untreated; a oz/sq yd weight. Section 15.260 1PAGE 2 i n j PIPING INSULATION r SECTION 15.260 2. Blanket: 1.0 Ib/cu ft density. G. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. H. Insulating Cement 1. ASTM C44c1. 2.02 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic 1. Jacket: one piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off white color. a) Minimum Service Temperature: O degrees F. b) Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c) Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM Ec16; 0.002 perm inches. d) Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E54; 25. e) Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50. f) Thickness: 15. g) Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation. PART S EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION A. verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 5.02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Insulated cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. S. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. 4. PVC fitting covers may be used. 5. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe r. Section 15.260 E PAGE S W PIPING INSULATION SECTION 15.260 penetrations. 6. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections,and expansion joints. D. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field applied. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. s. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive. 4. PVC fitting covers may be used. 5. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. E. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1 /2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. s. insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. S. Insert Material: ASTM C640 cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. F. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. 5.05 TOLERANCE A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at normal conditions, as materials indicated. 5.04 GLASS FIBER INSULATION SCHEDULE PIPING SYSTEMS A. Plumbing Systems Domestic Hot Water Supply Domestic Cold Water END OF SECTION PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Inch Inch All sizes 1 /2" All sizes 1 /2" Section 15.260 PAGE 4 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15.410 PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Domestic water. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASME B 16.5 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. B. ASME 51 6.1 8 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. C. ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. D. ASME 55 1.Q - Building Service Piping. E. ASME SEC IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. F. ASTM ASS - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. G. ASTM A?4 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. H. ASTM A254/A254M - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. I. ASTM 552 - Solder Metal J. ASTM B68 - Seamless Copper Water Tube (ASTM 555M - Seamless Copper Water Tube [Metric]). K. ASTM C 5 6 4 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. L. ASTM D2555 - Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. M. AWWA C65 1 - Disinfecting Water Mains. N. CISPI 501 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. Section 1.5.410 PAGE 1 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15.410 O. NCPINB - Procedure Specifications for Pipe Welding. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Product Pate: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve _ data and ratings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Nelding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME code. c. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with local plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. _ C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.0'7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANP PROTECTION A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labelling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. — P. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed — system. Section 15.4 10 PAGE 2 7 7 r 3 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15.410 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM Al service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum. B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D5054. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2555, solvent weld with ASTM 02564 solvent cement. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A'74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub -and -spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. 2.05 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A.. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM Al4, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum. B Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 501, hubless, service weight. S. Fittings: Cast iron. 4. Joints: CISPI S 10, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp -and - shield assemblies. 2.04 WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe (5 inches or less): ASTM D 1 965, Schedule 40: 1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, PVC 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld. Section 15.410 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15.410 5. Trace Wire: Magnetic detecable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with °Water Service,, in large letters. B. PVC Pipe (4 inches or greater): AWWA C900 Class 1 50: 1. Fittings: AWWA C 1 1 1, cast iron. 2. Joints: ASTM VS 15ci compression gasket ring. 5. Trace Wire: Magnetic detecable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with °Water Service^ in large letters. 2.05 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM 542, hard drawn. 5. Fittings: ASME B 16.16, cast copper alloy or ASME B 1 6.22 wrought copper and bronze. 6. Joints: AYNIS ASA BCuP silver braze. 2.06 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM 566 (ASTM 1388M), Type L hard drawn. 1 . Fittings: ASME B 1 6.1 6, cast copper alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM 552, solder, Grade Q5TA. 2.0? FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLING5 A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 1 50 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inch: 1 . Ferrous pipe: class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip- on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. copper tube and pipe: class 1 50 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.06 GATE VALVES A. Up To and Including 2 Inches: bronze body, bronze trim, non rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder or threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches: iron body, bronze trim, rising 5tem,05 4 Y, handwheel, solid Section 15.4 10 PAGE 4 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15.410 wedge disc,.flanged ends. 2.09 SY4ING CHECK VALVES A. Up To and Including 2 Inches: 1. Bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, threaded ends. 2.10 RELIEF VALVES A. Temperature and pressure Relief: bronze body, tef Ion seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief 2 1 O degrees F°, capacities ASME certified and labelled. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over - excavated. 5.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 5.05 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. V. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. Section 15.4 10 PAGE 5 FLUM5ING PIPING sEGTION 15.410 E. . Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. CG. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less _ than 1.5 ft of cover. J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. L. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. M. Excavate in accordance with other sections. N. 5ackfill in accordance with other sections. O. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. _ P. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 0. sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. 5.04 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. S. install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. solder adapters to pipe. G. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 0. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. Section 15.4 10 PACGE 6 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15.410 5.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1 /8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients. B. Slope water piping minimum 0.25 percent and arrange to drain at low points. 5.06 VISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between ?.4 and 1.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 8O Mg/1-residual. V. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. N. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C65 1. 5.01I SERVICE CONNECTIONS f A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check t invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and r^ cover to avoid freezing. 4 k a B. Provide new water service complete with approved double check backflow preventer. 1. Provide 1 8 gage galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6 inch above floor and 6 inch minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 2 inches of loose batt insulation stuffing. 7 Section 15.410 PAGE 'I PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15.410 END OF SECTION Section 15.410 FASE 8 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15.450 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floor drains. B. Cleanouts. C. Backflow preventers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASME A 1 12.2 1.1 - Floor Drains. B. ASME A 1 1 2.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors. C. ASSE 101 1 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. D. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent. E. ASSE 101 5 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. F. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types. 6. PDI WH-201 - Water Hammer Arrestors. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. 1.04 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, baakfiow preventers. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. Section 15.450 PAGE 1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15.450 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR GRAINS A. 1. Manufacturers: a. Wade Model W-1 105. 2. ANSI A 1 12.2 1. 1; galvanized cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel -bronze strainer. 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Interior Finished Floor Areas: 1. Manufacturers: a. Wade Model W-6050-5. 2. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. B. Interior Finished Wall Areas: 1. Manufacturers: a. Wade Model W-54.10-R. 2. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. Manufacturers: 2. ANSI/ASSE 10 1 5; bronze body with bronze internal parts and Section 15.450 PAGE 2 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15.450 stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non- threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. V. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures (each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 5/4 inch minimum, and minimum 18 inches long. ENO OF SECTION Section 1 5.450 PAGE 5 t PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15.440 A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. G C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.011 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products at site under provisions in other sections. B. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. c. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving ._ factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply two sets of faucet washers, flush valve service kits, and lavatory supply fittings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS P-1, P-2 A. Bowl: 1. Manufacturer: EI jer Model 1 1 1-1 5 15. 2. other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Kohler b. American Standard c. Substitutions: Not permitted. S. ASME A 1 12.1 9.2; wall hung, siphon jet vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1 /2 inch back spud, china bolt caps. B. Concealed Flush Valve: 1 . Manufacturer: Sloan Royal Model 152. 2. other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. Section 15.440 PAGE 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES 5ECT160 6.440 a. Delany b. Substitutions: Not permitted. 5. ASME A 1 12.1 5.1; concealed rough brass, diaphragm type with exposed chrome plated push button and escutcheon, screw driver stop and vacuum breaker maximum 1.6 gallon flush volume. C. seat: 1. Manufacturer: Olsonite Model 10. 2. Solid black white plastic, open front, extended back, brass bolts, without cover. D. Wall Mounted Carrier: 1. Manufacturer: Wade Model W-s00. 2. ASME A 1 1 2.6.1; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. 2.02 WALL HUNG URINALS, P-5 A. urinal: 1. Manufacturer: EI jer Model 1 6 1-10ci 5. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Kohler. b. American Standard. c. Substitutions: Not permitted. S. ASME A 1 12.15.2; vitreous china, wall hung siphon jet urinal with shields, integral trap, back spud, steel supporting hanger. B. Concealed Flush Valve- 1 . Manufacturer: Sloan Roayal Model 1 is. 2. other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Delany. b. Substitutions: Not permitted. 5. ASME A 1 1 2.1 5.1; concealed rough brass, diaphragm type with exposed chrome plated[push button and escutcheon, wheel handle stop and vacuum breaker; maximum 1 gallon flush volume. j C. Wall Mounted carrier: 1. Manufacturer: Wade MOdeIA-400.. 2. ASME A 1 12.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. f 2.05 LAVATORIES, P-4 r- Section 15.440 PAGE 5 i PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15.440 A. Cast Iron Wall Hung Basin: 1. Manufacturer: Eljer Model 05 2-0 1 '7 4. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Kohler. b. American standard. c. substitutions: Not permitted. 5. ASME A 1 12.1 41. 1; porcelain enamelled cast iron wall -hung lavatory 20 X 1 8 inch minimum, with 4 inch high back, single hole drilling, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression. B. supply Fitting: 1. Manufacturer: Eljer Model 555-285 1. '- 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Kohler. b. American standard. Co. substitutions: 5. ASME A 1 12.15. 1; chrome plated supply fitting with open grid strainer, water economy aerator with maximum 2.0 gpm flow, indexed, -- handles single lever handle. C. Wall Mounted Carrier: 1. Manufacturer: Wade Model W-400. 2. ASME A 1 1 2.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded studs for fixture hanger, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs. 2.04 HAND SINK, P-5 A. Cast Iron Wall Hung Basin: 1. Manufacturer: Eljer Model 55Q-2650. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Kohler. b. American Standard. c. substitutions: Not permitted. 5. ASME A 1 12.1 al. 1; porcelain enameled cast iron wall -hung lavatory 20 X 1 8 inch minimum, with 4 inch high back, single hole drilling, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression. B. supply Fitting: 1. Manufacturer: Eljer Model 5591-2850. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Kohler. b. American standard. a. Substitutions: Not permitted. 5. ASME A 1 12. 15. 1; chrome plated combination supply fitting with open Section 15.440 PAGE 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15.440 grid strainer, water economy aerator with maximum 2.0 gpm flow, indexed handles. C. Wall Mounted Carrier: 1. Manufacturer: Wade Model W-400. 2. ASME A 1 1 2.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded studs for fixture hanger, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs. 2.05 SINKS, P-6 D. Three Compartment Bowl• 1. Manufacturer: As provided in other sections of the specifications. E. Trim: 1. Manufacturer: T d S Model B-250. 2. ASME A 1 12.1 8. 1; chrome plated brass supply with 12" swing spout, water economy aerator with maximum 2.2 gpm flow, indexed lever handles. F. Accessories: As provided in other sections of the specifications. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION A. verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 5.02 PREPARATION A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough -in schedule for particular fixtures. 5.05 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver stops, reducers, and escutcheons. Section 15.440 PAGE 5 PLUM5ING FIXTURES SECTION 15.440 C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in other sections of specifications, color to match fixture. F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. 5.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough -in and installation. 5.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjusting installed work under provisions in other sections of the specifications. 5. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without — splashing, noise, or overflow. 5.06 GLEANING A. Cleaning installed work under provisions in other sections 5. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 5.017 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit use of fixtures. END OF SECTION Section 15.440 PAGE 6 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15.450 PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Heaters. B. Pumps: Sewage Ejectors 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASME Section 80 - Pressure Vessels. B. NFPA 'f 0 - National Electrical Code. C. UL 1 '74 - Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Product Data: 1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 5. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Manufacturer's installations Instructions 1.05 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. Section 15.450 k PAGE _1 r PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15.4.50 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 8. Provide pumps with manufacturers name, model number and rating/capacity identified. C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). S. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). V. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non -overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.09 RE6ULATORY REQUIREMENTS — A. Conform to NFPA'10, UL 1 '14 requirements for water heaters. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Incas suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANO PROTECTION A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.0ci WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters, and sewage ejectors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RESIDENTIAL ELECTRIC kNATER HEATERS A. Manufacturer: state Model PV- 10-1 ONS-K. .- section 15.450 PACvE 2 r PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15.450 B. Type: Automatic, electric, vertical storage. C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel, thermally insulated with one inch thick glass fiber; encased in corrosion -resistant steel jacket; baked -on enamel finish. V. controls: Automatic water thermostat with temperature range from 120 to 1 *70 degrees F, flanged or screw -in nichrome elements, enclosed controls and electrical junction box. E. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, magnesium anode, and ASME temperature and pressure relief valve. 2.02 5" SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS A. CONSTRUCTION 1. Each pump shall be of the sealed submersible type. Model S5S as manufactured by Aurora/Hydromatic Pumps. The pump volute, motor and seal housing shall be high quality gray cast iron. ASTM A-48. Glass 25. The pump discharge shall be fitted with a 5" standard ASA 125 lb. flange, faced and r drilled for the'S5S models. All external mating parts shall be machined and BONA N Rubber O-ring sealed on a beveled edge. Gaskets shall not be acceptable. All fasteners exposed to the pumped liquids shall be 500 series stainless steel B. ELECTRICAL POWER CORa Electrical power cord shall be STW-A. water resistant 600V. 60 *a. UL and GSA approved and applied dependent on amp draw for size. 2. The pump shall be double protected with compression fitting and an epoxy potted area at the power cord entry to the pump. A separation between the junction box area of the pump and the motor by a stator lead sealing gland or terminal board shall not be acceptable. S. The power cable entry into the cord cap assembly shall first be made with a compression fitting. Each individual lead shall be stripped down to the bare wire, at staggered intervals, and each strand shall be individually separated. This area of the cord cap shall then be filled with an epoxy compound potting which will prevent water contamination to gain entry even in the event of wicking or capillary attraction. 4. The power cord assembly shall then be connected to the motor leads with insulated butt connectors rather than a terminal board that allows for 7 Section 1 5.450 PAGE 5 C} i PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15.45.0 possible leaks. 5. The cord cap assembly where bolted to the motor housing shall be sealed with a 5UNA N Rubber O-Ring on a beveled edge to assure proper sealing. C. MOTOR 1. The stator, rotor and bearings shall be mounted in a sealed submersible type housing. The stator windings shall have Class F insulation,( 155'C or 51 1 'F). and dielectric oil filled motor. NEMA 5 design. Single phase motors shall have thermal type overload protection with automatic reset and be capacitor start with capacitor located in the control panel. Three phase motors shall use magnetic starters with overload relays located in the control panel for further protection. Because air -filled motors do not dissipate heat as efficiently as oil -filled motors, air -filled designs shall not be acceptable. 2. Stators shall be securely held in place with threaded fasteners so they may be easily removed in the field without the use of heat or a press. Stators held — by a heat shrink fit shall not be acceptable. Stators must be capable of being repaired or rewound by local motor service station. Units which require service only by the factory shall not be acceptable. No special tools shall be required for pump and motor disassembly. D. BEAKIN(S S AND SHAFT 1. An upper radial bearing and lower thrust bearing shall be required. Both the upper radial bearing and the lower thrust bearing shall be a heavy duty single row ball bearing which are permanently lubricated by the dielectric oil which fills the motor housing. Double row, sealed grease packed bearings shall not be acceptable. Bearings which require lubrication according to a prescribed schedule shall not be acceptable. Bearings shall be locally available. 2. The shaft shall be machined from a solid 505 stainless steel and be a design which is of larger diameter with minimum overhand to reduce shaft deflection and prolong bearing life. E. SEALS 1. The pump shall have a mechanical seal, John Crane Type 2 1, BF 1 c 1. The seal shall be used with the rotating seal face being carbon and the stationary seal face to be ceramic. The seal shall be replaceable without disassembly of the seal plate and without the use of special tools. Pump -out vanes shall be present on the backside of the impeller to keep contaminants out of the seal area. Units which require the use of tungsten -carbide seals or foreign Section 15.450 PA67E 4 i r PLUMBING EQUIPMENT r SECTION 15.450 1 manufactured seals shall not be acceptable. Seals shall be locally available. F. IMPELLER .,. 1. Impeller shall be of the two -vane, semi -enclosed design and have pump -out vanes on the backside of the impeller to prevent grit and other materials ' from collecting in the seal area. Single vane design impellers which cannot be easily trimmed and which do not maintain balance with wear causing shaft deflections and reducing seal and bearing life are not acceptable. Impeller { shall not require coating. Because most impeller coatings do not remain beyond the very early life of the impeller, efficiency and other performance data submitted shall be based on performance with an uncoated impeller. . attempts to improve efficiency by coating impeller shall not be acceptable. 2. impellers shall be dynamically balanced. The tolerance values shall be as listed below according to the International Standard Organizations grade 6.5 for rotors in rigid frames. At 1 150 RPM tolerate shall be .02 in. I.-.02/Ib of impeller weight. S. The impeller shall be slip tit to the shaft and key driven. A 500 series �. stainless steel washer and impeller bolt shall be used to fasten the impeller to the shaft. Threaded shafts for attachment of the impeller shall not be acceptable. G. CASING 1 . The casing shall be of the end suction volute type having sufficient strength and thickness to withstand all stress and strain from service at full operating pressure and load. The casing shall be of the centerline discharge type equipped with an automatic pipe coupling arrangement for ease of installation and piping alignment. The design shall be such that the pumps will be automatically connected to the discharge piping when lowered into position with the guide rails. The casing shall be accurately machined and bored for register fits with the suction and casing covers. H. PAINTING 1 . The pump shall be painted after assembly with an air dry enamel. The paint shall be applied in one coat. SERVICEABILITY 1. The complete rotating assembly shall be capable of being removed from the volute without disturbing the discharge piping and volute. The motor housing, Section 15.450 FA&E 5 C` i PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15.450 seal plate and impeller still attached to the shaft shall be capable of being lifted out of the volute case from the top as one assembly. 2.05 PULTRUDED MAIL 5" NON -CLOG SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS A. GENERAL 1 . The system shall include 1- 5" submersible non -clog sewage pump(s) with hydraulic sealing diaphragm, discharge base elbow, guide rail, piping, access frame and hatch cover, float mounting bracket. lifting chain or cable. and control equipment. B. HYDRAULIC SEALING FLANGE 1 . A hydraulically operated sealing flange, complete with BUNA N rubber diaphragm type sealing gasket, shall be mounted on each pump discharge. The diaphragm shall be held in place by a clamp ring with stainless steel fasteners. 2. When pump is activated, the resulting discharge pressure shall force the diaphragm seal against the flange face of the discharge elbow providing a leak proof seal. When pressure is removed, the diaphragm shall relax so that there is no mechanical connection to the discharge, and pump with hydraulic sealing flange may be easily removed. Units utilizing total flange -to -flange connection which could corrode together shall not be acceptable. C. GUIDE RAIL 1 . The guide rail used to direct the pump in proper alignment with the stationary discharge piping shall be of a single rail design. The single rail shall be a non- corrosive, non -sparking, PRP pultrusion formed in the shape of an I-beam. Dual rail or single rail systems utilizing a metal material such as galvanized piping or stainless steel piping shall not be acceptable. 2. The pump shall be automatically connected to the discharge connection elbow when lowered into place, and shall be easily removed for inspection or service. There shall be no need for personnel to enter the pump well. Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection elbow shall be accomplished by a single down and in motion of the pump. D. GUIDE BRACKET 1. A sliding guide connector shall be an integral part of the pump unit. No other carrier shall be required. The sliding guide connector shall be 500 series stainless steel wire formed. When the pump approaches the bottom of the Section 15.450 1 1PAGE 6 r e PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15.450 non -corrosive FRP I-beam pultrusion, two V-shaped rods cast into the hydraulic sealing flange shall contact two (2) 500 series stainless steel arms I flanking the discharge elbow. The downward sliding action of the rod shall clean the arms of any sewage debris and align the sealing flange. A small crescent -shaped peg on the bottom of the base elbow flange shall insure proper spacing of the sealing faces, and thus eliminate the potential for further metal -to -metal contact. I" 11 E. DISCHARGE BASE ELBOW 1. A discharge base elbow shall be furnished for each pump. The discharge base r' elbow shall rest squarely on the floor of the pump well and be securely anchored to the floor. Units which require a separate concrete or fabricated structure in order to elevate the base elbow above the pump well floor shall not be acceptable. 2. The base elbow shall be equivalent to 5" steel piping in size. The elbow shall .- be at QO degrees with a standard 125-lb. flange faced and drilled on the a outlet side and an inlet flange faced only. The inlet side shall have the flange face sprayed with water base, air dry enamel. The non -corrosive FRP I-beam shall attach to the base elbow with 500 series stainless steel fasteners. The dry base elbow shall be painted with one coat of water base. air enamel. F. ACCESS FRAME AND DOOR 1. A separate access frame assembly shall be supplied with separate hinged door for removal of each pump. Access frame assembly and door shall be aluminum with 500 series stainless steel hinges and hardware. The door shall i_ be aluminum tread plate to provide a skid -proof surface. Frame opening dimensions shall be 20 1 /4" X 50 5/4" with a separate access frame and f door required for each pump. Load rating for the door and frame assembly shall be -p- 500 psf in light traffic areas. Frame shall support float mounting bracket_ The non -corrosive FRP I-beam shall attach to the access frame assembly with SOO series stainless steel fasteners. A recessed, stainless steel handle shall be provided with each door. A safety latch to hold door in open position shall also be provided. r• CG. FLOAT MOUNTING BRACKET �. 1. A float mounting bracket shall be provided. Float mounting bracket shall provide strain reliefs to hold level control cords and allow adjustment of level controls to desired pumping and alarm levels. Continuous cords are to run from pump, and level controls to control panel. No splices shall be made in wiring. Float mounting bracket shall be fabricated from steel and coated for •-► Section 15.450 PAGE i r J PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15.450 corrosion resistance. Float mounting bracket shall attach to access frame with 50o series stainless steel fasteners. A dielectric spacer should be installed between the aluminum access frame and float mounting bracket. H. LIFTING CHAIN/CABLE 1. Each pumping unit shall be provided with a galvanized lifting chain. The lifting chain shall be of sufficient length to extend from the pumping unit at one end _ to the top of the wet well at the other end. The access frame shall provide a hook to attach the lifting chain when not in use. _ I. FLOATS 1. Floats shall be Hydromatic 5g00 Mercury Switch. J. WARRANTY 1. In addition to the manufacturers standard. A 5-year warranty shall also be provided. 2.04 SIMPLEX "0" CONTROL PANEL A. GENERAL 1. The motor control panel shall be assembled and tested by a shop meeting U.L. Standard 505 for industrial controls. The motor and control panel shall be assembled and tested by the same manufacturer supplying the pump so as to insure suitability and assurance of experience in matching controls to motors and to insure single source responsibility for the equipment. B. CONSTRUCTION 1. The controls for the pump shall be contained in a steel enclosure meeting NEMA 5R requirements with a hinged door and neoprene gasket. 2. The enclosure shall have provisions for padlocking. A nameplate shall be permanently affixed to the panel and include the model number, voltage. phase. hertz, ampere rating and horsepower rating. A warning label against electric shock shall be permanently affixed to the outer door. All fasteners shall be Soo series stainless steel or type 6065T5 aluminum, or thermoplastic. The outer door shall be attached to the enclosure using captured, quarter turn thermoplastic screws and non -corrosive lift off Section 15.450 PAGE 5 r• PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15.450 hinge. The hinge shall permit the outer door to be operated from the main enclosure. when opened. by a simple upward motion. A hinge arrangement which requires unbolting for removal of the outer door is not acceptable. 5. A steel back panel with electroplated bright zinc and clear chromate finish shall be provided. A painted steel back panel will not be acceptable. The back panel shall be mounted on stainless steel bolts using stainless steel nuts and lock washers to maintain enclosure integrity and shall be used as the means for mounting the components in the enclosure. 4. A run light and hand -off -auto switch shall be provided. Run light and hand- off -auto switch shall be mounted on tan electroplated bright zinc with clear chromate finish steel bracket. The run light and hand -off -auto switch shall be properly labeled as to function. The hand -off -auto switch shall be rocker type with an electrical life of 50,000 operations. The run light shall match the hand -off -auto switch in appearance and have an electrical life of 5.000 hours. Run light shall be red. S. The incoming power shall be 250 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz service. Terminal blocks with box type lugs shall be supplied to terminate all wiring for floats and heat and seal sensors for the pump. it required. The pump leads shall be terminated at the overload relay or at box type terminal blocks. The terminal blocks for the float connections shall be on the pump controller. 6. A circuit breaker shall be used to protect from line faults and to disconnect the pump from the incoming power. Circuit breaker shall be thermal magnetic and sized to meet NEC requirements for motor controls. I. The magnetic starter shall include a contactor with a minimum mechanical life of 5,000,000 operations and a minimum contact life of 1,000,000 operations. A definite purpose contactor shall not be acceptable. The magnetic starter shall include an overload relay which is ambient temperature compensated and bimetallic. The overload relay shall have test and reset buttons. The overload relay shall be capable of being set in either manual or automatic reset mode. In the manual mode. reset shall be accomplished only by the operator. At 6 times lull load amps the overload relay shall trip within 10 seconds or Class 10 rated overload relays shall be required. 5. Control voltage shall be 120 VAC and may be accomplished by the means of a transformer or available line voltage. A. control fuse and on/off switch shall protect and isolate the control voltage from the line. Q. Wire ties shall be used to maintain panel wiring in neat bundles for maintenance and to prevent interference with operating devices. All wiring � r !+ Section 15.450 PAGE 9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15.450 shall be color coded to facilitate maintenance and repair of the control panel. Where a color is repeated. number coding shall be added. A schematic shall be permanently attached to the inside surface of the front door. 10. All ground connections shall be made with ring tongue terminals and star washers to assure proper ground. 1 1. h simplex pump controller shall be provided for control logic. Pump controller shall be solid state utilizing a printed circuit board to avoid conventional wiring. The printed circuit board of the pump controller shall be made of U.L. listed materials. 12. The pump controller shall indicate float circuit operations utilizing red amber LED indicator lights. LED indicator lights shall provide adequate information so that they can be used for diagnosis in troubleshooting problems located in the float circuits. Each LED shall be permanently labeled on the pump controller as to function. 15. Pump controller shall have provisions for connecting float level controls and heat sensor monitors. where applicable, to box type lug connectors. 14. Box type lug connectors shall be made of polyamide thermoplastic to exclude aging due to heat influences. Phenolic type terminal blocks on the pump controller shall not be acceptable. Each terminal block shall be property and permanently labeled on the pump controller as to its purpose. 15. Wiring of hand -off -auto switch. run light. contactor. and overload to the pump controller shall be accomplished by means of plug connectors. The pump controller shall have male header assemblies from the corresponding devices as labeled on the pump controller for that male header assembly. Header assemblies shall be constructed of a corrosion -resistant thermoplastic material having a temperature range of -55'C to 105'C and copper alloy, bright acid tin over nickel plating contacts. There shall be no external lights on the pump control panel. All must be NEMA 4X rated and on a hinged dead front door on the panel interior. C. OPTIONS 1. Panel shall be equipped with the following additional features. High level alarm light (Flashing) - High level alarm horn with push to silence switch. - Lightning suppressor - 1 10 volt convenience outlet Section 15.450 FACIE 10 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15.450 - cycle counter - Swing dead front door with fused disconnect PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to NSF NFPA 54 UL requirements. B. coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system. c. Pumps: 1. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. END OF SECTION Section 15.450 PAGE 1 1 DUCTWORK SECTION 15.aCi0 PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Kitchen hood ductwork. 1.02 REFERENCES A. A5TM A S6 - Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. C. ASTM A 1 6'°I - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. D. ASTM A 566 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality. E. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. F. ASTM A 529 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality. G. ASTM A 565 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High -Strength, Low -Alloy, Hot -Rolled and cold -Rolled. H. ASTM A 56ci - Steel, carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. I. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. J. NFPA ci 6 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease -Laden vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment. K. SMACNA - HVAC Duct construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts In accordance with ASHKAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. Section 15.6ci0 PAGE 1 DUCTWORK SECTION 15.6a0 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials, duct liner and duct connectors. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.06 OUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HYAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.0-1 OUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. installer: company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 RECGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. construct ductwork to NFPA clOA and NFPA a b standards. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A52'1 galvanized steel sheet, lock -forming quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM AQO. Section 15.bQ0 PA&E 2 r DUCTWORK SECTION 15.6 Q 0 S. Steel Ducts: ASTM A366, A569, A568. C. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. i-' P. Sealant: E 1. Non -hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. E. Hanger Rod: ASTM AS 6; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Puct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1 /2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber Insulation. f• G. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum So degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than ' duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch (100 r mm) cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. 14 E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral Wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 50 degree conical tee connections may be used. r 2.05 KITCHEN HOOP EXHAUST DUCTWORK r A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and NFPA a 6. B. Construct of 16 gage carbon steel or 1 8 gage stainless steel, using continuous external welded joints. r.. PART S EXECUTION Section 15.840 PAGE 8 7 DUCTWORK SECTION 1 5.8 q 0 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. C. Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. E. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. CG. Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with provisions for clean out. Use stainless steel for ductwork exposed to view and stainless steel or carbon steel for ducts where concealed. H. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 5.02 GLEANING A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. B. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. 5.05 SCHEDULES A. DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM Evaporative MATERIAL steel Kitchen Hood Exhaust steel Section 1 5.890 PAGE 4 DUCTWORK SECTION 15.890 5. DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS Evaporative 1 /2 inah ENO OF SECTION Section 1 5.890 PAGE 5 CONDUIT SECTION 16.1 1 1 PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liq,uidtight flexible metal conduit. V. Electrical metallic tubing. E. Nonmetal conduit. F. Fittings and conduit bodies. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16. 150 - Boxes. B. Section 16.1 '70 - Grounding and Bonding. C. Section 1 6.1 90 - Supporting Devices. P. Section 16.1 4 5 - Electrical Identification. 1.OS REFERENCES A. ANSI C60. 1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C60.5 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. V. ANSI/NFPA '70 - National Electrical Code. E. NECA "Standard of Installation." F. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. CG. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EFC-60). Section 16.1 1 1 PAGE 1 A CONDUIT SECTION 16.1 1 1 H. NEMA TC 5 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, fittings, and conduit bodies. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of other sections. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORACvE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle Products to site under provisions of other sections. B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. Section 16.1 1 1 PAG7E 2 r i r CONDUIT SECTION 16.1 1 1 c. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Size: 1 /2 inch unless otherwise specified. B. Underground Installations: 1. All underground locations: Use PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit, field wrapped rigid galvanized stela conduit, or concrete encased non metallic conduit. 2. Minimum Size: 5/4 inch. C. Outdoor Locations. Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit. D. Dry Locations: 1. All dry locations: Use electrical metallic tubing. 2.02 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied. 2. Picoma industries. S. Wheatland. B. Rigid Steel conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings. 2.05 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Robroy Industries. B. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil thick. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit. Section 1 6.1 1 1 PAGE 8 CONDUIT SECTION 16.1 1 1 — 2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Electri-Flex B. Description: Interlocked steel construction. C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1. 2.05 LIOUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: r` 1. Electri-Flex. B. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. -' C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1. 2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Wheatland. 2. Allied 5. Picoma Industries. _ B. Description: ANSI C80.5; galvanized tubing. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel compression type. 2.0-7 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon. B. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 5. - 2.06 CONDUIT SEALING COMPOUND A. General 1. Compounds for sealing ducts and conduit shall have putty -like consistency workable with the hands a temperatures as low as 55 degrees F, shall neither slump at a temperature of 500 degrees F, not harden materially Section 16. 1 1 1 PAGE 4 F ' CONDUIT r- SECTION 16.1 1 1 when exposed to the air. Compounds shall adhere to clean surfaces of fiber or plastic ducts; metallic conduits or conduit coatings; concrete, masonry, or lead; any cable sheaths, jackets, covers, or insulation materials; and the common metals. compounds shall form a seal without dissolving, noticeably r. changing characteristics, or removing any of the ingredients. compounds shall have no injurious effect upon the hands of workmen or upon materials. PART S EXECUTION S.O 1 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel [; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits]. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16. 1 QO. G. ao not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. M. Po not cross conduits in slab. N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. r^ Section 16.1 1 1 PAGE 5 w 1' CONDUIT SECTION 16.1 1 1 O.- Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. 0. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. S. use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes. T. Install no more than equivalent of three 9o-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use [hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. V. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses [seismic] [. control] [and] expansion joints. W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16.1 10. Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 1 6.1 9 S. AA. duct shall be cleaned with an assembly that consists of a flexible mandrel (manufacturers standard product in lengths recommended for the specific size and type of duct) that is 1 /4 inch less than inside diameter of duct, 2 wire brushes and a rag. The cleaning assembly shall be pulled through conduit a minimum of 2 times or until less than a volume of 8 cubic inches of debris is expelled fro the duct. 138. The cable lubricant shall be compatible with the cable jacket for cable that is being installed. Application of lubricant shall be in accordance with lubricant manufacturer's recommendations. Section 1 6.1 1 1 PAGE 6 i ii k CONDUIT SECTION 16.1 1 1 CC. Conduit passing vertically through slabs -on -grade shall be rigid steel or IMC. Rigid steel conduits installed below slab -on -grade or in the earth shall be field wrapped with 0.010 inch thick pipe -wrapping plastic tape applied with a 5o percent overlay, or shall have a factory -applied polyvinyl chloride, plastic resin, or epoxy coating system. 5.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods with similar building materials. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. ENO OF SECTION Section 16.1 1 1 PASE 'i BUILDING WIRE AND GABLE SECTION 16.128 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16.1 615 - Electrical Identification. 1.05 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA i0 - National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Product Data: Provide for each type of conductor insulation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.06 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. 1.017 QUALIFICATIONS Section 16.125 PAGE 1 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16.125 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA '10. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.Oq PROJECT CONDITIONS A. verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Conductor sizes are based on copper, r C. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. PART 2 PRODUCTS — 2.01 BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Okonite. 2. Triangle. B. Aetna. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of other sections. B. Description: single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor: Copper. D. Insulation voltage Rating: 500 volts. E. Insulation: NFPA 'f 0, Type THHN/THWN. 2.02 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Connectors: Section 1 6.1 2 5 PAGE 2 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16.125 1. 5M, Scotch Lock. 2. Thomas 4 Betts. 5. Burndy. 4. Substitutions: Refer to other sections. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION A. verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. D. The cable reel shall be inspected for correct storage positions, signs of physical damage, and broken end seals. If end seal is broken, moisture shall be removed from cable in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations. 5.02 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway in accordance with Section 1 6.1 1 1 before installing wire. 5.05 WIRING METHODS A. All Locations: Use only [building wire, Type THHN/THAN insulation, in raceway. B. Use wiring methods indicated. 5.04 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. B. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation." C. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AAG and smaller. D. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. E. use conductor not smaller than 12 AAG for power and lighting circuits. Section 1 6.1 25 PAGE 5 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16.125 F. Use conductor not smaller than 1 6 ANS, for control circuits. G. Use 10 ,4WG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than "f 5 feet. H. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. I. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. J. Protect exposed cable from damage. K. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. L. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. M. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. N. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 Ay4cv and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 1 5o percent of insulation rating of conductor. -- O. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AkNG and smaller. P. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10,4WG and smaller. _ O. Splices below grade or In wet locations shall be sealed type conforming to ANSI C 1 1 a.1 or shall be waterproofed by a sealant -filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable, thermosetting tube. R. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 1 6 1 cis. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. 5.05 FIELD OUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 'f .5.1. END OF SECTION Section 16. 1 25 PAGE 4 BUILVING WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16.125 Section 16.125 PASTE 5 7 r 4 r r F 7 BOXES SECTION 1 6.1 SO PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 1 6.140 - Wiring Devices: Wail plates in finished areas. 1.05 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. M. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment ( 1000 Volts Maximum). F. NFPA "f 0 - National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA '10. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET 5OXF-5 Section 1 6.1 SO PAGE 1 BOXES . SECTION 1 6.150, A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1 /2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA 05 2. Co. cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. D. INall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16.140. 2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA 05 1, galvanized steel. B. Surface Mounted cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat -flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. Co. In -Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. cover.. Nonskid cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 5. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC". D. Fiberglass Handholes: Die molded glass fiber hand holes: 1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 inch x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side. 2. Cover: Glass fiber weatherproof cover with nonskid finish. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION A. verify locations of outlets prior to rough -in. S.02 INSTALLATION A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." section 1 6.1 80 PAGE 2 SORES SECTION 16.150 ` S. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire r pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. a C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in section for outlet device. D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140. F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. H. Inaccessible ceiling Areas: install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. 1. install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section O1.210. J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. i N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. F. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. 0. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. Section 16. 1 $0 FAGS 5 BOXES SECTION 1 6. 1 SO R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. T. Oo not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. U. Support boxes independently of conduit. V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Oo not use sectional box. IN. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. X. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations and wet locations. Y. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations. Z. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall not be less than 4 inches square. AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. 5.05 APJUSTING A. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 5.04 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. ENO OF SECTION Section 16.150 1PAGE 4 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16.140 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and decorative box covers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 1 6.1 50 - Boxes. 1.08 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.06 OUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.0'7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. Section 16.140 PAGE 1 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16.140 B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. — PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL SWITCHES A. General• _ 1. Leviton. Model 1 22 1-1. 2. Hubbell. Model 1 22 1-I. 5. General Electric. Model 5 q 5 1 -2G. S. Utilize equivalent series of switches for Double Pole, Three Way, and Four Way applications. C. Substitutions: Refer to other sections. D. Color: Ivory. — 2.02 RECEPTACLES A. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: 1. Leviton. Model5562-I. 2. Hubbell. Model5562-I. S. General Electric. Model GE5562-2. S. GFCI Receptacle: 1 Leviton. Model 65 q q-I. 2. Hubbell. Model GF 52621. S. General Electric. Model GFR 5542. 2.05 WALL PLATES A. Cover Plate: Smooth stainless steel. S. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. Section 16. 140 PAGE 2 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16.140 B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. c. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 5.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. clean debris from outlet boxes. 5.05 INSTALLATION A. install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. c. Install switches with OFF position down. V. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. F. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. H. use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. I. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. 5.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PROOUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under section 1 6 150 to obtain mounting heights specified. B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 1 8 inches above finished floor. D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter. Section 16. 140 PAGE 3 WIRING VEVICES SECTION 16.140 E. Install telephone jack 1 8 inches above finished floor. F. Install telephone jack for side -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches above finished floor. 6. Install telephone jack for forward -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 above finished floor. 5.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. S. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. V. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each 6FCI receptacle device for proper operation. . F. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational. 5.06 AD.IUSTIN6 A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 5.0'7 GLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION Section 16.140 PAGE 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 16. 1 '10 FART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). B. NFFA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.05 GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Metal underground water pipe. B. Metal frame of the building. C. Rod electrode. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEkN A. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections. 1.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground. S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. Section 1 6.1 '10 PAS,E 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 1 6.1 '10 -- 1.01 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products _ specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1 .OQ REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS _ A. Conform to requirements of NFPA '70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS - 2.01 ROD ELECTRODES A. Manufacturers: 1. Blackburn. 2. Substitutions: Refer to other sections. _ B. Material: Copper -clad steel. C. Diameter: 1 /2 inch. D. Length: 8 feet. 2.02 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: ` 1. Midwest Electric. 2. Bridgeport Fittings. 5. Blackburn. 4. Substitutions: Refer to other sections. B. Material: Bronze. - 2.05 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: Section 16. 1 '70 PAGE 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 1 6.1 'TO 1. Cadweld. 2. Substitutions: Refer to other sections. 2.04 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Grounding Electrode conductor: Size to meet NFPA 'To requirements or as indicated. PART 8 EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 5.02 INSTALLATION A. install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. B. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. c. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground. D. Equipment Grounding conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder [and branch] circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. 5.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with META ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in META ATS, Section ?.1 8. Section 1 6.1 'IO END OF SECTION PAGE 8 7 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16.190 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA'10 - National Electrical Code. 1.OS SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 'YO. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: section 1 6. 1 QO PAGE 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16.190 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps. S. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. -I. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. 2.02 STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturer: 1. Unistrut. 2. B-Line. 5. Substitutions: Refer to other sections. B. Description: Galvanized steel. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder -actuated anchors. E. Do not drill or cut structural members. F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. G. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall. I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and Section 1 leiei0 PAGE 2 SUPPORTING DEVIGE5 5EGTION 16.190 panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. END OF 5EGTION Section 16.1 90 PA6E 5 I ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16. 1 4 5 PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDE5 A. Nameplates and labels. 5. Wire and cable markers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section O�I.g00 - Painting. 1.05 REFERENCES B. AN51/NFPA '10 - National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections. S. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFFA *70. S. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. B. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. Section 16.1 415 PAGE 1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 1 6.1 9 5 2. Communication cabinets. C. Letter Size: 1. Use' 1 /5 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1 /4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with S/ 1 6 inch white letters on black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device stations. 2.02 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 5.02 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive. C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. D. Phase conductors shall be identified by color coding. The color of the insulation on phases A, S, and C respectively (for three phase) or phases A and B respectively (for single phase) of different voltage systems shall be as follows: 1 20/208 volt, 5-phase: Black, red, and blue. 2'7'7/450 volt, 5-pha5e: Brown, orange, and yellow. 120/240 volt, single/phase: Black and red. Conductor phase and voltage identification shall be made by color -coded insulation for all conductors smaller than No. 6 AWG. For conductors No. 6 AYVG and larger, identification shall be made by color -coded insulation, or conductors with black insulation may be furnished and identified by the use of half -lapped Section 16. 1 15 PAGE 2 r ELECTRICAL IVENTIFIroATION SECTION 1 6.1 cl 5 bands of colored electrical tape wrapped around the insulation for a minimum of 5 inches of length near the end, or other method as submitted by the Contractor and approved by the contracting Officer. Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Phase identification by a particular color shall be maintained continuously for the length of a circuit, including junctions. E. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 5 inches below finished grade. Section 16.195 ENV OF SECTION PA&E 5 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION 16.421 PART 1 GENERAL 1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination with the utility company. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NFPA '70 - National Electrical Code. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Characteristics: 205YI 120 volts, three phase, four -wire, 60 Hertz. B. Service Entrance: 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Utility Company: Lubbock Power d Light. B. Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. conform to requirements of NFPA "10. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Utility Company drawings. PART 2 EXECUTION NOT USED Section 16.421 PAGE 1 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION 16.421 PART S EXECUTION S.01 PREPARATION A. arrange with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. Coordinate with utility company for requirements. Contractor shall include in the bid, all expenses added by the utility company. END OF SECTION Section 1 6.42 1 PAGE 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES SECTION 16.441 PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fusible switches. B. Nonfusible switches. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16.411 - Fuses. 1.05 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical contractors Association). B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage cartridge Fuses. C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches ((000 Volts Maximum). V. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for 'Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (published by the International Electrical Testing Association). E. NFPA -10 - National Electrical code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Refer to other sections. B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Record actual locations of enclosed switches In project record documents. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Section 16.441 PAGE 1 F ENCLOSED SWITCHES SECTION 16.441 1.017 REGULATORY REOUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 'f 0. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D. B. General Electric. c. Westinghouse. D. Substitutions: Refer to other sections. 2.02 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. B. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class F. fuses. 2.05 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. 2.04 ENCLOSURES A. Fabrication: NEMA KS 1. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type SR. PART 3 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. Section 16.44 1 PAGE 2 IWO I f �r ENCLOSED SWITCHES SECTION 16.441 C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. 5.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA AT5, except section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA AT5, Section -7.5. Section 16.441 END OF SECTION PA6E 5 PANELSOARDS SECTION 16.4-TO PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Distribution panelboards. S. Branch circuit panelboards. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16. 1 "TO - Grounding and Bonding. B. Section 1 6.1 a 5 - Electrical Identification. C. Section 16.411 -Fuses. 1.05 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA AS 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA IC5 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). E. NEMA PO 1 - Panelboards. F. NEMA PS 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 volts or Less. CG. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment (published by the International Electrical Testing Association). H. NFPA '70 - National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIENI A. Refer to other sections. Section 16.4"70 PAGE 1 PANELBOAR175 SECTION 16.4i0 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.06 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements in project record documents. B. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.0? QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT5 A. conform to requirements of NFPA 'f 0. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.001 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each panelboard key. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PISTRIBUTION PANEL50ARD5 A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Manufacturers: 1 . Square D. Section 1 6.4'f O PAGE 2 PANELBOARDS SECTION 1 6.4 i O 2. General Electric. 8. Westinghouse. 4. Substitutions: Refer to other sections. C. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type or fusible switch type as indicated. D. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard. E. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: Fully rated system with ampere ratings as indicated. F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt -on type circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACK for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. G. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated. H. Enclosure: NEMAPS 1, Type 1. I. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Section 01 boo - Material and Equipment: Product Options [and Substitutions]. B. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. General Electric. 8. Westinghouse. 4. Substitutions: Refer to other sections. C. Description: NEMA PS 1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. D. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard[; provide insulated ground bus where scheduled]. E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: Fully rated system with ampere Section 16.4 *7 0 PAGE S A PANELBOARDS SECTION 1 6.4 -7 0 Interrupting ratings as indicated. F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AS 1, bolt -on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SIND for lighting circuits, Type HACK for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. G. Enclosure: NEMA PS 1, Type 1. H. Cabinet Sox: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide. I. Cabinet Front: Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1. 1 and the NECA "standard of Installation." B. Install panelboards plumb. C. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of section 16 1 95. G. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16 1 '70. 5.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section '7.4 for switches, Section "1.5 for circuit breakers. Section 16.4*70 PAGE 4 is f PANEL5OARPS SECTION 16.4?0 5.05 ADJUSTING A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. 5ection 16.4"YO END OF SECTION PAGE 5 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES SECTION 16.510 PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C15.31 Q - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High -Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps - classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C52.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. Co. ANSI C52.4 - Ballasts for High -Intensity Discharge and'Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple Supply Type). D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices -Dimensional Requirements. E. NFPA ?0 - National Electrical code. F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety code. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. 1.06 OUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in Section 16.510 PAGE 1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES SECTION 1 &.5 10 this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.0'f REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA '70. S. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. G. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES A. Furnish Products as scheduled. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. 5. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing. C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure or Provide auxiliary members spanning ceiling grid members to support surface mounted luminaires. F. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. G. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. H. Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place. I. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units at height as indicated on Drawings. Section 1 &.5 10 PAGE 2 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES SECTION 16.510 J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. K. connect luminaires, as indicated. L. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. M. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. N. Install specified lamps in each luminaire. 5.02 FIELD OUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 5.05 ADJUSTIN6 A. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 5.04 GLEANING A. clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. C. clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 5.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Section 16.510 PAGE 5